Rigol DHO914S oscilloscope User Manual

Guaranty and Declaration

Trademark Information

RIGOL

is the trademark of RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Notices

• RIGOL products are covered by P.R.C. and foreign patents, issued and pending.

• RIGOL reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications and pricing

policies at the company's sole decision.

• Information in this publication replaces all previously released materials.

• Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.

• RIGOL shall not be liable for either incidental or consequential losses in connection with the

furnishing, use, or performance of this manual, as well as any information contained.

• Any part of this document is forbidden to be copied, photocopied, or rearranged without prior

written approval of RIGOL.

Product Certification

RIGOL guarantees that this product conforms to the national and industrial standards in China as

well as the ISO9001:2015 standard and the ISO14001:2015 standard. Other international standard

conformance certifications are in progress.

If you have any problem or requirement when using our products or this manual, please contact

RIGOL.

E-mail: ser[email protected]

Website:

http://www.rigol.com

Section Description Page

List of Figures.............................................................................................................................

VIII

List of Tables...............................................................................................................................XIV

1 Safety Requirement .........................................................................................................1

1.1 General Safety Summary .................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 Safety Notices and Symbols ............................................................................................................ 2

1.3 Measurement Category .....................................................................................................................3

1.4 Ventilation Requirement ................................................................................................................... 4

1.5 Working Environment ........................................................................................................................4

1.6 Care and Cleaning ...............................................................................................................................6

1.7 Environmental Considerations ........................................................................................................6

2 Product Features .............................................................................................................. 7

3 Document Overview ....................................................................................................... 8

4 Quick Start ........................................................................................................................10

4.1 General Inspection ............................................................................................................................10

4.2 Appearance and Dimensions ........................................................................................................10

4.3 To Prepare for Use .............................................................................................................................11

4.3.1 To Adjust the Supporting Legs ........................................................................................11

4.3.2 To Connect to Power ...........................................................................................................12

4.3.3 Turn-on Checkout ................................................................................................................ 12

4.3.4 To Set the System Language ............................................................................................13

4.3.5 To Connect the Probe .........................................................................................................13

4.3.6 Function Inspection .............................................................................................................15

4.3.7 Probe Compensation .......................................................................................................... 17

4.4 Product Overview ..............................................................................................................................17

4.4.1 Front Panel Overview ..........................................................................................................18

4.4.2 Rear Panel Overview ........................................................................................................... 24

4.4.3 User Interface Overview .................................................................................................... 26

4.5 Touch Screen Gestures .................................................................................................................... 28

4.5.1 Tap .............................................................................................................................................28

4.5.2 Drag .......................................................................................................................................... 29

4.5.3 Pinch&Stretch ........................................................................................................................30

4.6 Parameter Setting Method ............................................................................................................ 30

4.7 To Use the Security Lock .................................................................................................................35

4.8 To Use the Built-in Help System ...................................................................................................36

5 Vertical System ............................................................................................................... 37

5.1 To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel ................................................................................37

5.2 To Adjust the Vertical Scale ........................................................................................................... 38

5.3 To Adjust the Vertical Offset ..........................................................................................................40

5.4 To Specify Channel Coupling ........................................................................................................ 41

5.5 To Specify Bandwidth Limit ........................................................................................................... 41

5.6 To Specify Input Impedance ..........................................................................................................42

5.7 To Invert a Waveform ...................................................................................................................... 42

5.8 To Set Probe ........................................................................................................................................43

5.9 To Specify the Amplitude Unit ......................................................................................................45

5.10 To Adjust Bias ..................................................................................................................................... 45

5.11 To Specify the Skew ..........................................................................................................................46

5.12 To Turn the Channel Label Display On/Off ...............................................................................46

6 Horizontal System ......................................................................................................... 48

6.1 To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base ........................................................................................... 48

6.2 To Adjust the Horizontal Position ................................................................................................49

6.3 Zoom Mode (Delayed Sweep) ......................................................................................................50

7 Acquisition System ........................................................................................................52

7.1 Acquisition Mode ..............................................................................................................................52

7.2 Sampling Mode ................................................................................................................................. 54

7.3 Sample Rate ........................................................................................................................................55

7.4 Memory Depth ...................................................................................................................................56

7.5 Horizontal Expansion Reference ..................................................................................................57

7.6 Roll Mode .............................................................................................................................................58

7.7 XY Mode ...............................................................................................................................................58

8 Triggering the Oscilloscope ....................................................................................... 61

8.1 Trigger Source .................................................................................................................................... 61

8.2 Trigger Level ........................................................................................................................................62

8.3 Trigger Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 62

8.4 Trigger Coupling ................................................................................................................................64

8.5 Trigger Holdoff ...................................................................................................................................64

8.6 Noise Rejection ..................................................................................................................................65

8.7 Trigger Type .........................................................................................................................................65

8.7.1 Edge Trigger ...........................................................................................................................66

8.7.2 Pulse Width Trigger .............................................................................................................67

8.7.3 Slope Trigger ..........................................................................................................................70

DHO900 User Guide

8.7.4 Video Trigger ......................................................................................................................... 73

8.7.5 Pattern Trigger .......................................................................................................................75

8.7.6 Duration Trigger ................................................................................................................... 78

8.7.7 Timeout Trigger .................................................................................................................... 81

8.7.8 Runt Trigger ........................................................................................................................... 83

8.7.9 Window Trigger .................................................................................................................... 86

8.7.10 Delay Trigger ..........................................................................................................................88

8.7.11 Setup/Hold Trigger ..............................................................................................................90

8.7.12 Nth Edge Trigger .................................................................................................................. 93

8.7.13 RS232 Trigger ........................................................................................................................ 95

8.7.14 I2C Trigger .............................................................................................................................. 98

8.7.15 SPI Trigger ............................................................................................................................ 102

8.7.16 CAN Trigger ......................................................................................................................... 105

8.7.17 LIN Trigger ............................................................................................................................108

8.8 Trigger Output Connector ........................................................................................................... 111

9 Math Operation ........................................................................................................... 112

9.1 Arithmetic Operation .....................................................................................................................113

9.2 Function Operation ........................................................................................................................116

9.3 FFT Operation .................................................................................................................................. 120

9.4 Logic Operation ...............................................................................................................................125

9.5 Digital Filter ...................................................................................................................................... 128

10 Measurements ..............................................................................................................133

10.1 Auto Scale ......................................................................................................................................... 133

10.2 Auto Measurements ...................................................................................................................... 134

10.2.1 Measurement Parameter .................................................................................................134

10.2.1.1 Time Parameters ................................................................................................ 134

10.2.1.2 Count Values ....................................................................................................... 135

10.2.1.3 Delay and Phase Parameters ......................................................................... 137

10.2.1.4 Voltage Parameters ...........................................................................................139

10.2.1.5 Other Parameters ...............................................................................................140

10.2.2 Select the Measurement Item ....................................................................................... 141

10.2.3 Measurement Settings .....................................................................................................143

10.2.4 Remove the Measurement Results ..............................................................................146

10.3 Cursor Measurements ...................................................................................................................147

10.3.1 Manual Mode ......................................................................................................................149

10.3.2 Track Mode .......................................................................................................................... 151

10.3.3 XY Mode ............................................................................................................................... 154

III

11 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter ............................................156

11.1 Digital Voltmeter (DVM) ...............................................................................................................156

11.1.1 Measurement Settings .....................................................................................................156

11.1.2 Remove the Measurement ............................................................................................. 158

11.2 Frequency Counter .........................................................................................................................158

11.2.1 Measurement Settings .....................................................................................................159

11.2.2 Reset Statistics .................................................................................................................... 160

11.2.3 Remove the Measurement ............................................................................................. 160

12 Digital Channel .............................................................................................................161

12.1 To Enable or Disable the Digital Channel ...............................................................................162

12.2 To Select the Digital Channel ......................................................................................................162

12.3 To Set the Threshold ......................................................................................................................162

12.4 To Set the Waveform Size ............................................................................................................163

12.5 To Set the Order ..............................................................................................................................163

12.6 Probe Calibration ............................................................................................................................163

12.7 Label Settings ...................................................................................................................................163

13 Histogram Analysis .....................................................................................................165

13.1 To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function ......................................................................165

13.2 To Select the Histogram Type .....................................................................................................166

13.3 To Select the Histogram Source ................................................................................................ 166

13.4 To Set the Histogram Height ......................................................................................................166

13.5 To Set the Histogram Range .......................................................................................................167

13.6 Histogram Analysis Results ......................................................................................................... 167

13.7 To Remove Results ..........................................................................................................................169

13.8 To Clear Statistics ............................................................................................................................169

14 Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for DHO914S and

DHO924S only)

......... 170

14.1 To Output Basic Waveforms ........................................................................................................170

14.1.1 To Output Sine ....................................................................................................................170

14.1.2 To Output Square .............................................................................................................. 171

14.1.3 To Output Ramp .................................................................................................................172

14.1.4 To Output Noise .................................................................................................................172

14.1.5 To Output DC ...................................................................................................................... 173

14.1.6 To Output the Arbitrary Waveform ............................................................................. 173

14.2 Modulation ....................................................................................................................................... 173

14.2.1 AM ...........................................................................................................................................174

14.2.2 FM ........................................................................................................................................... 175

DHO900 User Guide

14.2.3 PM ...........................................................................................................................................176

15 Bode Plot (for DHO914S and DHO924S only) .................................................. 178

15.1 Basic Setting .....................................................................................................................................179

15.1.1 To Enable or Disable the Bode Function ....................................................................179

15.1.2 To Start or Stop the Operation ......................................................................................179

15.1.3 To Set the Input Source ................................................................................................... 179

15.1.4 To Set the Output Source ............................................................................................... 180

15.1.5 To Set the Sweep Type .....................................................................................................180

15.1.6 To Enable or Disable the Filter ...................................................................................... 180

15.1.7 To Set the Display Type ....................................................................................................180

15.1.8 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................ 182

15.2 Cursor ................................................................................................................................................. 182

15.3 Amp/Freq Setting ........................................................................................................................... 183

15.4 Store and Load .................................................................................................................................183

16 Reference Waveform ..................................................................................................185

16.1 To Enable Ref Function ................................................................................................................. 185

16.2 To Set the Reference Waveform ................................................................................................ 185

16.3 To Set the Ref Waveform Display ..............................................................................................186

16.4 Export and Import Operation .....................................................................................................187

17 Pass/Fail Test ................................................................................................................. 189

17.1 To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function .................................................................190

17.2 To Select the Source ...................................................................................................................... 190

17.3 To Create a Mask .............................................................................................................................190

17.4 To Set the Output Form of the Test Results ...........................................................................191

17.5 To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation ........................................................................192

17.6 To Display the Statistics of the Test Results ...........................................................................192

18 Protocol Decoding ......................................................................................................194

18.1 Parallel Decoding ............................................................................................................................194

18.1.1 Clock Setting (CLK) ............................................................................................................195

18.1.2 Bus Setting ...........................................................................................................................196

18.1.3 Display-related Settings .................................................................................................. 198

18.1.4 Event Table ...........................................................................................................................198

18.2 RS232 Decoding ..............................................................................................................................199

18.2.1 Source Setting .....................................................................................................................201

18.2.2 To Set Data Package ......................................................................................................... 201

18.2.3 Display-related Settings .................................................................................................. 202

18.2.4 Event Table ...........................................................................................................................203

18.3 I2C Decoding ....................................................................................................................................204

18.3.1 Source Setting .....................................................................................................................204

18.3.2 Display-related Settings .................................................................................................. 205

18.3.3 Event Table ...........................................................................................................................206

18.4 SPI Decoding ....................................................................................................................................207

18.4.1 To Set the Source ...............................................................................................................208

18.4.2 To Set Mode and Data ..................................................................................................... 209

18.4.3 Display-related Settings .................................................................................................. 210

18.4.4 Event Table ...........................................................................................................................210

18.5 LIN Decoding ................................................................................................................................... 211

18.5.1 Signal Configuration .........................................................................................................212

18.5.2 Display-related Settings .................................................................................................. 213

18.5.3 Event Table ...........................................................................................................................213

18.6 CAN Decoding .................................................................................................................................214

18.6.1 Signal Configuration .........................................................................................................215

18.6.2 Display-related Settings .................................................................................................. 216

18.6.3 Event Table ...........................................................................................................................216

19 Multi-pane Windowing ............................................................................................. 218

20 Waveform Recording and Playing .........................................................................220

20.1 Common Settings ...........................................................................................................................220

20.2 Record Options ................................................................................................................................221

20.3 Play Options ..................................................................................................................................... 222

21 Search and Navigation .............................................................................................. 225

21.1 Search ................................................................................................................................................. 225

21.2 Navigation .........................................................................................................................................227

22 Display Control .............................................................................................................231

22.1 Display Type ......................................................................................................................................231

22.2 Persistence Time ............................................................................................................................. 231

22.3 Waveform Intensity ........................................................................................................................232

22.4 To Set the Screen Grid ...................................................................................................................232

22.5 Display Settings ...............................................................................................................................232

22.6 Show Scale ........................................................................................................................................ 233

22.7 Color Grade .......................................................................................................................................233

22.8 Waveform Freeze ............................................................................................................................233

23 Store and Load ............................................................................................................. 234

23.1 To Enter the Storage Menu ......................................................................................................... 234

23.2 To Save a File ....................................................................................................................................234

DHO900 User Guide

23.2.1 To Save Image .....................................................................................................................234

23.2.2 To Save Wave ...................................................................................................................... 236

23.2.3 Save Setup ............................................................................................................................238

23.2.4 Binary Data Format (.bin) ................................................................................................239

23.3 To Load a File ....................................................................................................................................242

23.4 Firmware Upgrade ..........................................................................................................................243

23.5 Disk Management .......................................................................................................................... 244

24 System Utility Function Setting ..............................................................................247

24.1 I/O Setting .........................................................................................................................................247

24.2 Basic Settings ................................................................................................................................... 249

24.3 About this Oscilloscope ................................................................................................................251

24.4 Other Settings ..................................................................................................................................252

24.5 Auto Config .......................................................................................................................................252

24.6 SelfCal .................................................................................................................................................253

24.7 Option List .........................................................................................................................................253

24.8 Quick Action Settings ....................................................................................................................253

24.9 Self-check .......................................................................................................................................... 256

25 Remote Control ............................................................................................................257

25.1 Remote Control via USB ...............................................................................................................258

25.2 Remote Control via LAN ...............................................................................................................258

26 Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................260

27 Appendix ........................................................................................................................261

27.1 Appendix A: Options and Accessories .................................................................................... 261

27.2 Appendix B: Warranty ................................................................................................................... 261

27.3 Appendix C: Factory Settings ..................................................................................................... 262

VII

List of Figures

Figure 4.1 Front View ..............................................................................................................

Figure 4.2 Side View ................................................................................................................11

Figure 4.3 Adjusting the Supporting Legs ......................................................................11

Figure 4.4 To Connect to Power ..........................................................................................12

Figure 4.5 Connecting the Passive Probe ........................................................................14

Figure 4.6 Connecting the Logic Probe ........................................................................... 15

Figure 4.7 Using the Compensation Signal .................................................................... 16

Figure 4.8 Square Waveform Signal ..................................................................................16

Figure 4.9 Probe Compensation .........................................................................................17

Figure 4.10 Front Panel ..........................................................................................................18

Figure 4.11 Rear Panel ............................................................................................................24

Figure 4.12 User Interface .....................................................................................................26

Figure 4.13 Tap Gesture .........................................................................................................29

Figure 4.14 Drag Gesture ......................................................................................................29

Figure 4.15 Pinch&Stretch Gesture ....................................................................................30

Figure 4.16 English Input Interface ....................................................................................31

Figure 4.17 Chinese Input Interface .................................................................................. 32

Figure 4.18 String Keypad .....................................................................................................33

Figure 4.19 Numeric Keypad ................................................................................................35

Figure 4.20 To Use the Security Lock ................................................................................36

Figure 5.1 Vertical Menu ....................................................................................................... 37

Figure 5.2 Waveform Invert On/Off .................................................................................. 43

Figure 5.3 Probe Setting Menu ...........................................................................................43

Figure 5.4 Zero Offset ............................................................................................................ 46

Figure 6.1 Horizontal Menu ................................................................................................. 48

Figure 6.2 Zoom Mode ..........................................................................................................51

Figure 7.1 Horizontal Menu ................................................................................................. 52

DHO900 User Guide

VIII

Figure 7.2 Display Modes ......................................................................................................54

Figure 7.3 Memory Depth .................................................................................................... 56

Figure 7.4 XY Menu .................................................................................................................59

Figure 7.5 Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation ......................... 60

Figure 8.1 Schematic Diagram of the Acquisition Memory ......................................63

Figure 8.2 Trigger Holdoff .....................................................................................................65

Figure 8.3 Edge Trigger Setting Menu ..............................................................................66

Figure 8.4 Positive/Negative Pulse Width .......................................................................68

Figure 8.5 Pulse Width Trigger Setting Menu ................................................................68

Figure 8.6 Positive Slope Time/Negative Slope Time ................................................. 70

Figure 8.7 Slope Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................ 71

Figure 8.8 Video Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................73

Figure 8.9 Pattern Trigger ..................................................................................................... 76

Figure 8.10 Pattern Trigger Setting Menu .......................................................................76

Figure 8.11 Duration Trigger ................................................................................................78

Figure 8.12 Duration Trigger Setting Menu ....................................................................79

Figure 8.13 Timeout Trigger .................................................................................................81

Figure 8.14 Timeout Trigger Menu ....................................................................................82

Figure 8.15 Runt Trigger ........................................................................................................83

Figure 8.16 Runt Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................84

Figure 8.17 Window Trigger Setting Menu .....................................................................86

Figure 8.18 Delay Trigger ......................................................................................................88

Figure 8.19 Delay Trigger Setting Menu ..........................................................................88

Figure 8.20 Setup/Hold Trigger .......................................................................................... 91

Figure 8.21 Setup/Hold Trigger Setting Menu ..............................................................91

Figure 8.22 Nth Edge Trigger ...............................................................................................93

Figure 8.23 Nth Edge Trigger Setting Menu .................................................................. 94

Figure 8.24 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Protocol .....................................................95

Figure 8.25 RS232 Trigger Setting Menu .........................................................................96

Figure 8.26 Sequence Diagram of I2C Protocol ............................................................98

Figure 8.27 I2C Trigger Setting Menu ...............................................................................99

Figure 8.28 Binary Format Setting ...................................................................................100

Figure 8.29 Hexadecimal Format Setting ......................................................................101

Figure 8.30 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus ........................................................................102

Figure 8.31 SPI Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................ 102

Figure 8.32 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus ........................................................ 105

Figure 8.33 CAN Trigger Setting Menu ..........................................................................105

Figure 8.34 Sample Position ..............................................................................................106

Figure 8.35 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus .......................................................... 108

Figure 8.36 LIN Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................108

Figure 8.37 Sample Position ..............................................................................................109

Figure 9.1 Math Menu .........................................................................................................112

Figure 9.2 Waveform Display Window of the Operation Results .........................113

Figure 9.3 Arithmetic Operation Menu ..........................................................................114

Figure 9.4 Operation Result Display Window ..............................................................114

Figure 9.5 Function Operation Menu .............................................................................117

Figure 9.6 Operation Result Display Window ..............................................................118

Figure 9.7 FFT Operation Menu ....................................................................................... 121

Figure 9.8 FFT Operation Window .................................................................................. 121

Figure 9.9 Peak Search .........................................................................................................124

Figure 9.10 Logic Operation Menu .................................................................................125

Figure 9.11 Operation Result Display Window ........................................................... 127

Figure 9.12 Digital Filter Menu .........................................................................................129

Figure 9.13 Operation Result Display Window ........................................................... 130

Figure 10.1 Time Parameters .............................................................................................134

Figure 10.2 Delay and Phase Parameters ......................................................................137

Figure 10.3 Voltage Parameters ....................................................................................... 139

Figure 10.4 Vertical Measurement Items ...................................................................... 141

DHO900 User Guide

Figure 10.5 Horizontal Measurement Items ................................................................ 142

Figure 10.6 Other Measurement Items ..........................................................................142

Figure 10.7 Measurement Settings Menu .................................................................... 143

Figure 10.8 Cursors ...............................................................................................................147

Figure 10.9 Manual Mode Setting Menu ......................................................................149

Figure 10.10 Manual Cursor Measurement Example ................................................151

Figure 10.11 Track Mode Setting Menu ........................................................................152

Figure 10.12 Track Measurement (before Horizontal Expansion) ........................ 153

Figure 10.13 Track Measurement (after Horizontal Expansion) ............................154

Figure 10.14 XY Mode Setting Menu ............................................................................. 154

Figure 11.1 DVM Setting Menu ........................................................................................157

Figure 11.2 Frequency Counter Setting Menu ............................................................159

Figure 12.1 LA Menu ............................................................................................................161

Figure 13.1 Histogram Menu ............................................................................................ 165

Figure 13.2 Histogram Analysis Interface .....................................................................166

Figure 13.3 Histogram Analysis Results .........................................................................168

Figure 14.1 AFG Setting Menu ..........................................................................................170

Figure 14.2 Modulation Interface ....................................................................................174

Figure 15.1 "Bode Plots" Setting Menu .........................................................................178

Figure 15.2 "Bode Plots" Setting Menu-Simplified Mode ...................................... 178

Figure 15.3 Bode Plot Waveform Display ..................................................................... 180

Figure 15.4 Bode Plot Chart Display ...............................................................................182

Figure 16.1 Reference Waveform Menu ........................................................................185

Figure 17.1 PassFail Menu ..................................................................................................189

Figure 17.2 PassFail Menu-Simplified ............................................................................ 189

Figure 17.3 Pass/Fail Test Interface ................................................................................. 192

Figure 18.1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding .............................................. 194

Figure 18.2 Parallel Decoding Menu .............................................................................. 195

Figure 18.3 Parallel Decoding Event Table ....................................................................199

Figure 18.4 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus ................................................199

Figure 18.5 RS232 Decoding Menu ................................................................................ 200

Figure 18.6 RS232 Decoding Event Table ..................................................................... 203

Figure 18.7 I2C Serial Bus ...................................................................................................204

Figure 18.8 I2C Decoding Menu ...................................................................................... 204

Figure 18.9 I2C Decoding Event Table ........................................................................... 206

Figure 18.10 SPI Serial Bus .................................................................................................207

Figure 18.11 SPI Decoding Menu ....................................................................................208

Figure 18.12 SPI Decoding Event Table .........................................................................211

Figure 18.13 LIN Decoding Menu ....................................................................................212

Figure 18.14 LIN Decoding Event Table .........................................................................213

Figure 18.15 CAN Decoding Menu ................................................................................. 214

Figure 18.16 Sample Position ............................................................................................216

Figure 18.17 CAN Decoding Event Table ...................................................................... 217

Figure 19.1 "Add Window" Menu ....................................................................................218

Figure 20.1 "Record" Menu ................................................................................................220

Figure 20.2 Minimized "Play" Menu ............................................................................... 223

Figure 21.1 Search Menu ....................................................................................................225

Figure 21.2 MarkTable Display ..........................................................................................227

Figure 21.3 Navigation Menu ........................................................................................... 228

Figure 21.4 Simplified Navigation Menu ...................................................................... 228

Figure 21.5 "Search Event" Navigation Setting Menu ..............................................229

Figure 21.6 "Frame Segment" Navigation Setting Menu ........................................229

Figure 22.1 Display Setting Menu ................................................................................... 231

Figure 23.1 Image Saving Setting Menu .......................................................................235

Figure 23.2 Waveform Saving Setting Menu ...............................................................237

Figure 23.3 Setup Saving Setting Menu ........................................................................238

Figure 23.4 Load Setting Menu ........................................................................................243

Figure 23.5 Upgrade Menu ................................................................................................244

DHO900 User Guide

XII

Figure 23.6 Disk Management Interface .......................................................................245

Figure 24.1 Self-calibration Menu ................................................................................... 253

Figure 24.2 Quick Menu ......................................................................................................254

XIII

List of Tables

Table 4.1 Power Adaptor Specifications ...........................................................................

Table 5.1 Probe Ratio ..............................................................................................................44

Table 8.1 Video Standard ...................................................................................................... 74

Table 9.1 Window Function ................................................................................................123

Table 9.2 Logic Operation .................................................................................................. 126

Table 18.1 Bus Setting ..........................................................................................................196

Table 23.1 BIN File Format ................................................................................................. 239

Table 23.2 File Header ..........................................................................................................240

Table 23.3 Waveform Header ............................................................................................240

Table 23.4 Waveform Data Header ................................................................................. 242

Table 27.2 Factory Settings ................................................................................................262

DHO900 User Guide

XIV

Safety Requirement

1.1 General Safety Summary

Please review the following safety precautions carefully before putting the instrument

into operation so as to avoid any personal injury or damage to the instrument and

any product connected to it. To prevent potential hazards, please follow the

instructions specified in this manual to use the instrument properly.

• Use Proper Power Cord.

Only the exclusive power cord designed for the instrument and authorized for

use within the destination country could be used.

• Connect the Probe Correctly.

If a probe is used, the probe ground lead must be connected to earth ground.

Do not connect the ground lead to high voltage. Improper way of connection

could result in dangerous voltages being present on the connectors, controls or

other surfaces of the oscilloscope and probes, which will cause potential hazards

for operators.

• Observe All Terminal Ratings.

To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markers on the instrument

and check your manual for more information about ratings before connecting

the instrument.

• Use Proper Overvoltage Protection.

Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach

the product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the danger of an

electric shock.

• Do Not Operate Without Covers.

Do not operate the instrument with covers or panels removed.

• Do Not Insert Objects into the Air Outlet.

Do not insert objects into the air outlet, as doing so may cause damage to the

instrument.

• Avoid Circuit or Wire Exposure.

Do not touch exposed junctions and components when the instrument is

powered on.

• Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures.

If you suspect that any damage may occur to the instrument, have it inspected

by RIGOL authorized personnel before further operations. Any maintenance,

Safety Requirement

adjustment or replacement especially to circuits or accessories must be

performed by RIGOL authorized personnel.

• Provide Adequate Ventilation.

Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the instrument,

which would cause damage to the instrument. So please keep the instrument

well ventilated and inspect the air outlet and the fan regularly.

• Do Not Operate in Wet Conditions.

To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never operate the

instrument in a humid environment.

• Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.

To avoid personal injuries or damage to the instrument, never operate the

instrument in an explosive atmosphere.

• Keep Instrument Surfaces Clean and Dry.

To avoid dust or moisture from affecting the performance of the instrument,

keep the surfaces of the instrument clean and dry.

• Prevent Electrostatic Impact.

Operate the instrument in an electrostatic discharge protective environment to

avoid damage induced by static discharges. Always ground both the internal and

external conductors of cables to release static before making connections.

• Use the Battery Properly.

Do not expose the battery (if available) to high temperature or fire. Keep it out of

the reach of children. Improper change of a battery (lithium battery) may cause

an explosion. Use the RIGOL specified battery only.

• Handle with Caution.

Please handle with care during transportation to avoid damage to keys, knobs,

interfaces, and other parts on the panels.

WARNING

Equipment meeting Class A requirements may not offer adequate protection to broadcast

services within residential environment.

1.2 Safety Notices and Symbols

Safety Notices in this Manual:

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not avoided, will result in

serious injury or death.

Safety Requirement

DHO900 User Guide

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not avoided, could result

in damage to the product or loss of important data.

Safety Notices on the Product:

• DANGER

It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in injury

or hazard immediately.

• WARNING

It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in

potential injury or hazard.

• CAUTION

It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in

damage to the product or other devices connected to the product.

Safety Symbols on the Product:

Hazardous

Voltage

Safety Warning Protective Earth

Terminal

Chassis Ground Test Ground

1.3 Measurement Category

Measurement Category

This instrument can make measurements in Measurement Category I.

WARNING

This instrument can only be used for measurements within its specified measurement

categories.

Measurement Category Definitions

• Measurement category I is for measurements performed on circuits not directly

connected to MAINS. Examples are measurements on circuits not derived from

MAINS, and specially protected (internal) MAINS derived circuits. In the latter

case, transient stresses are variable. Thus, you must know the transient withstand

capability of the equipment.

• Measurement category II is for measurements performed on circuits directly

connected to low voltage installation. Examples are measurements on household

appliances, portable tools and similar equipment.

Safety Requirement

• Measurement category III is for measurements performed in the building

installation. Examples are measurements on distribution boards, circuit-breakers,

wiring (including cables, bus-bars, junction boxes, switches and socket-outlets) in

the fixed installation, and equipment for industrial use and some other

equipment. For example, stationary motors with permanent connection to a

fixed installation.

• Measurement category IV is for measurements performed at the source of a

low-voltage installation. Examples are electricity meters and measurements on

primary overcurrent protection devices and ripple control units.

1.4 Ventilation Requirement

This instrument uses a fan to force cooling. Please make sure that the air inlet and

outlet areas are free from obstructions and have free air. When using the instrument

in a bench-top or rack setting, provide at least 10 cm clearance beside, above and

behind the instrument for adequate ventilation.

CAUTION

Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the instrument, which

would cause damage to the instrument. So please keep the instrument well ventilated and

inspect the air outlet and the fan regularly.

1.5 Working Environment

Temperature

Operating: 0℃ to +50℃

Non-operating: -30℃ to +60℃

Humidity

• Operating:

Below +30℃: ≤90%RH (without condensation)

+30℃ to +40℃: ≤75% RH (without condensation)

+40℃ to +50℃: ≤45%RH (without condensation)

• Non-operating:

Below +60℃: ≤90%RH (without condensation)

WARNING

To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never operate the

instrument in a humid environment.

Safety Requirement

DHO900 User Guide

Altitude

• Operating: below 3 km

• Non-operating: below 15 km

Protection Level Against Electric Shock

ESD ±8kV

Installation (Overvoltage) Category

This product is powered by mains conforming to installation (overvoltage) category II.

WARNING

Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach the

product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the danger of an electric shock.

Installation (Overvoltage) Category Definitions

Installation (overvoltage) category I refers to signal level which is applicable to

equipment measurement terminals connected to the source circuit. Among these

terminals, precautions are done to limit the transient voltage to a low level.

Installation (overvoltage) category II refers to the local power distribution level which

is applicable to equipment connected to the AC line (AC power).

Pollution Degree

Pollution Degree 2

Pollution Degree Definition

• Pollution Degree 1: No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs.

The pollution has no effect. For example, a clean room or air-conditioned office

environment.

• Pollution Degree 2: Normally only nonconductive pollution occurs. Temporary

conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected. For example, indoor

environment.

• Pollution Degree 3: Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that

becomes conductive due to condensation occurs. To be found in industrial

environment or construction sites (harsh environments). For example, sheltered

outdoor environment.

• Pollution Degree 4: The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused by

conductive dust, rain, or snow. For example, outdoor areas.

Safety Class

Class 2

Safety Requirement

1.6 Care and Cleaning

Care

Do not store or leave the instrument where it may be exposed to direct sunlight for

long periods of time.

Cleaning

Clean the instrument regularly according to its operating conditions.

1. Disconnect the instrument from all power sources.

2. Clean the external surfaces of the instrument with a soft cloth dampened with mild

detergent or water. Avoid having any water or other objects into the chassis via the

heat dissipation hole. When cleaning the LCD, take care to avoid scarifying it.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the instrument, do not expose it to caustic liquids.

WARNING

To avoid short-circuit resulting from moisture or personal injuries, ensure that the

instrument is completely dry before connecting it to the power supply.

1.7 Environmental Considerations

The following symbol indicates that this product complies with the WEEE Directive

2002/96/EC.

The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or

human health. To avoid the release of such substances into the environment and

avoid harm to human health, we recommend you to recycle this product

appropriately to ensure that most materials are reused or recycled properly. Please

contact your local authorities for disposal or recycling information.

You can click on the following link

https://int.rigol.com/services/services/declaration

to download the latest version of the RoHS&WEEE certification file.

Safety Requirement

DHO900 User Guide

Product Features

• Ultra-low noise floor, purer signal, never miss the small signals

• Up to 12 bits resolution for all the models of this series

• Max. analog bandwidth of 250 MHz, 4 analog channels

• 16 digital channels (std.), logic probe required to be purchased if needed

• Max. real-time sample rate of 1.25 GSa/s

• Max. memory depth of 50 Mpts

• Vertical sensitivity range: 200 μV/div to 10 V/div

• Max. capture rate of 1,000,000 wfms/s (in UltraAcquire mode)

• Digital phosphor display with real-time 256-level intensity grading

• Integrates the AFG function, bode plot analysis, histogram, digital signal

analysis, and etc

• Waveform search and navigation function allows you to debug the signal

anomalies faster

• 7" (1024x600) capacitive multi-touch screen

• Brand new Flex Knob brings user-friendly experience

• USB Device & Host, LAN, and HDMI interfaces (std.) for all the models of this

series

• Novel and delicate industrial design, easy to operate

• Unique online upgrade

The DHO900 series is RIGOL's new launched high-performance economical digital

oscilloscope. Though compact in design, it has superior performance. It features a

capture rate up to 1,000,000 wfms/s (in UltraAcquire Mode), 50 Mpts memory

depth, 12 bits resolution, and low noise.

The DHO900 series supports 16 digital channels. One instrument can make an

analysis on both the analog and digital signals to meet the embedded design and

test scenarios. With an affordable price equivalent to purchasing an entry-level

instrument, you can access the auto serial and parallel bus analysis, bode plot

analysis, and other functions to meet the test demands in the R&D, education, and

scientific research fields.

Product Features

Document Overview

This manual gives you a quick overview of the front and rear panel, user interface as

well as basic operation methods of DHO900 series.

TIP

For the latest version of this manual, download it from RIGOL official website (

http://

www.rigol.com

Publication Number

UGA37100-1110

Software Version

Software upgrade might change or add product features. Please acquire the latest

version of the manual from RIGOL website or contact RIGOL to upgrade the software.

Format Conventions in this Manual

1. Key

The front panel key is denoted by the menu key icon. For example,

indicates the "Default" key.

2. Menu

The menu item is denoted by the format of "Menu Name (Bold) + Character

Shading" in the manual. For example, Setup indicates the "Setup" sub-menu under

the "Utility" function menu. You can click or tap

Setup to access the "Setup" menu.

3. Operation Procedures

The next step of the operation is denoted by ">" in the manual. For example,

> Storage indicates first clicking or tapping and then clicking or tapping

Storage.

4. Connector

The front/rear panel connector is denoted by "Brackets + Connector Name (Bold)",

for example, [AUX OUT].

5. Knob

Label Knob Label Knob

Horizontal

POSITION

Horizontal Position

Knob

Multipurpose

Knob 1

Document Overview

DHO900 User Guide

Label Knob Label Knob

Horizontal

SCALE

Horizontal Scale

Knob

Multipurpose

Knob 2

Vertical

POSITION

Vertical Position

Knob

LEVEL

Trigger Level Knob

Vertical

SCALE

Vertical Scale

Knob

- -

Content Conventions in this Manual

DHO900 series digital oscilloscope includes the following models. Unless otherwise

specified, this manual takes DHO924S as an example to illustrate the operation

methods of DHO900 series.

Model Max. Analog Bandwidth No. of Analog Channels

DHO914 125 MHz 4

DHO914S 125 MHz 4

DHO924 250 MHz 4

DHO924S 250 MHz 4

Document Overview

Quick Start

4.1 General Inspection

1. Inspect the packaging

If the packaging has been damaged, do not dispose the damaged packaging or

cushioning materials until the shipment has been checked for completeness and

has passed both electrical and mechanical tests.

The consigner or carrier shall be liable for the damage to the instrument resulting

from shipment. RIGOL would not be responsible for free maintenance/rework or

replacement of the instrument.

2. Inspect the instrument

In case of any mechanical damage, missing parts, or failure in passing the electrical

and mechanical tests, contact your RIGOL sales representative.

3. Check the accessories

Please check the accessories according to the packing lists. If the accessories are

damaged or incomplete, please contact your RIGOL sales representative.

Recommended Calibration Interval

RIGOL suggests that the instrument should be calibrated every 18 months.

4.2 Appearance and Dimensions

161.75 mm

265.36 mm

Figure 4.1 Front View

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

77.38 mm

Figure 4.2 Side View

4.3 To Prepare for Use

4.3.1 To Adjust the Supporting Legs

Adjust the supporting legs properly to use them as stands to tilt the oscilloscope

upwards for stable placement of the oscilloscope as well as better operation and

observation. You can also fold the supporting legs when the instrument is not in use

for easier storage or shipment, as shown in the figure below.

（b）Fold the supporting legs

Supporting Legs

（a）Unfold the supporting legs

Figure 4.3 Adjusting the Supporting Legs

Quick Start

4.3.2 To Connect to Power

The power requirements of the oscilloscope are DC, 12 V, 4 A. Please use the power

adaptor provided in the accessories to connect the oscilloscope to the AC power

source (100 V to 240 V, 50 Hz to 60 Hz), as shown in the figure below.

Power Cord Connector

Figure 4.4 To Connect to Power

Table 4.1 Power Adaptor Specifications

Item Description

Input 100 V to 240 V, 50 Hz to 60 Hz, 1.2 A Max

Output DC, 12 V, 4 A, 48 W

CAUTION

The power adaptor provided in accessories can only be used to power RIGOL instruments.

Do not use it for mobile phone and other devices.

WARNING

To avoid electric shock, ensure that the instrument is correctly grounded.

4.3.3 Turn-on Checkout

After the instrument is connected to the power source, press the power key at the

lower-left corner of the front panel to power on the instrument. During the start-up

process, the instrument performs a series of self-tests. After the self-test, the splash

screen is displayed.

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

• Restart: Click or tap > Restart. Then a prompt message "Are you sure to

reboot?" is displayed. Click or tap

OK to restart the instrument.

• Shutdown:

- Click or tap

> Shutdown. Then a prompt message "Are you sure to

shutdown?" is displayed. Click or tap

OK to shut down the instrument.

- Press

and a prompt message "Are you sure to shutdown?" is displayed.

Click or tap

OK to shut down the instrument.

- Press

twice to shut down the instrument.

- Press

for three seconds to shut down the instrument.

TIP

You can also click or tap

> Utility > Setup and set the "Power status" to "Switch on". The

instrument powers on once connected to power.

4.3.4 To Set the System Language

This oscilloscope supports multiple languages. You can click or tap > Utility >

Setup > Language to select the system language.

4.3.5 To Connect the Probe

RIGOL provides passive probes and logic probes (optional) for DHO900 series. For

specific probe models, refer to

DHO900 Data Sheet.

For detailed technical

information of the probes, please refer to the corresponding Probe User Guide.

Connect the Passive Probe

1. Connect the BNC terminal of the probe to an analog channel input terminal of the

oscilloscope on the front panel as shown in the figure below.

2. Connect the ground alligator clip or spring of the probe to the circuit ground

terminal, and then connect the probe tip to the circuit point to be tested.

Quick Start

Figure 4.5 Connecting the Passive Probe

After you connect the passive probe, check the probe function and probe

compensation adjustment before making measurements. For details, please refer to

Function Inspection

and

Probe Compensation

Connect the Logic Probe

1. Connect the output terminal of the logic probe to the digital channel input

terminal on the front panel of the oscilloscope in the correct direction, as shown in

the figure below.

2. Connect the other terminal of the logic probe to the signal terminal under test.

DHO900 provides the optional PLA2216 active logic probe. To cater to different

application scenarios, PLA2216 provides two methods to connect the signal under

test. For details, refer to

PLA2216 Active Logic Probe User Guide

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

Figure 4.6 Connecting the Logic Probe

CAUTION

The digital channel input terminal does not support hot plugging. Do not insert or pull

out the logic probe when the instrument is in power-on state.

TIP

• For ground connection of high-speed signals, the ground lead shall be connected to the

ground test point near the measured signal, and the ground lead shall be kept as short

as possible.

• If there are a large number of input signal channels, please connect each signal to a

ground signal as far as possible. If there is only one ground test point, connect all ground

leads on the probe to the ground test point.

• Set the threshold value of the logic probe reasonably according to the actual level range

of the measured signal, and set the threshold value in the middle of the level range.

4.3.6 Function Inspection

1. Press the front-panel and a prompt message "Restore default settings?"

is displayed. Click or tap

OK to restore the instrument to its factory default

settings.

2. Connect the ground alligator clip of the probe to the "Ground Terminal" as shown

Figure 4.7

Quick Start

3. Use the probe to connect the input terminal of CH1 and the "Compensation Signal

Output Terminal" of the probe, as shown in

Figure 4.7

Compensation Signal

Output Terminal

Ground Terminal

Figure 4.7 Using the Compensation Signal

4. Set the probe ratio based on the attenuation of the probe, and then click or tap

> Auto.

5. Observe the waveform on the display. In normal condition, you should see a

square waveform similar to the waveform shown in the figure below.

Figure 4.8 Square Waveform Signal

6. Test the other channels in the same way. If you see the waveform, but the square

wave is not shaped correctly as shown above, perform the procedure described in

Probe Compensation

. If you do not see the waveform, perform those steps again.

WARNING

To avoid electric shock when using the probe, please make sure that the insulated wire of

the probe is in good condition. Do not touch the metallic part of the probe when the

probe is connected to high voltage source.

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

4.3.7 Probe Compensation

When used for the first time, the oscilloscope probe must be compensated to match

the input characteristics of the oscilloscope channel to which it is connected. The

non-compensated or poorly compensated probe may cause measurement errors. The

compensation procedure is as follows:

1. Perform Step 1, 2, 3 and 4 in Function Inspection.

2. Check the displayed waveforms and compare them with the waveforms shown in

Figure 4.9

Over compensated Under compensatedPerfectly compensated

Figure 4.9 Probe Compensation

3. Use the probe compensation adjustment tool provided in the accessories to adjust

the low-frequency compensation adjustment hole on the probe until the displayed

waveform is consistent with the "Perfectly compensated" waveform shown in the

above figure.

4.4 Product Overview

Unless otherwise specified, this chapter takes DHO924S as an example to introduce

the appearance and dimensions, front and rear panels, and user interface of the

DHO900 series oscilloscope.

Quick Start

4.4.1 Front Panel Overview

Figure 4.10 Front Panel

1. 7'' Capacitive Touch Screen

Displays the waveforms, menu labels, and parameter settings, system state,

prompt messages, and other information.

2. Multipurpose Knobs

- Non-menu operation:

When not operating on the menu, you can rotate the knob 1 to adjust the

waveform brightness. When a cursor, decoding, Math waveform, or reference

waveform is added on the screen, you can rotate the multipurpose knob to

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

move the cursor (knob 1 and 2), adjust the decode threshold (knob 1) and

decode result display position (knob 2), adjust the vertical scale (knob 1) and

vertical offset (knob 2) of the math/reference waveform. You can click or tap

Flex Knob on the Toolbar at the upper-right of the screen to set priority.

- Automatic: Cursor > Math/Ref/Decode > Intensity (default priority).

- Manual: all non-menu operation items are listed at the lower part of the

Flex

Knob menu. You can select one of them as the current item for multipurpose

knob to adjust.

- Menu operation:

When operating on the menu, you can rotate the multipurpose knob 1/2 to

adjust the value in the menu. When you click or tap an input field and then the

/ icon is displayed in the input field, it indicates that you can use

multipurpose knob 1/2 to set the value. The LED indicator of the corresponding

knob is illuminated. At this point, you can rotate the knob to adjust the value or

press the knob to restore the parameter to the default value.

When using the virtual numeric keypad or drop-down list, you can rotate the

knob to navigate through the keypad or drop-down list and press the knob to

select an item.

3. Analyse Key

Press to access the Analyse menu. In this menu, you can access analysis

features including digital voltmeter (DVM), counter, power analysis, waveform

recording, and pass/fail.

4. Measure Key

Press

to access the Measure menu. You can select the waveform parameters

in the menu. For details, refer to

Select the Measurement Item

5. Cursor Key

Press

to enable cursor measurements. The results are displayed in the right-

side "Result" bar. Three cursor modes are available: Manual, Track, and XY; wherein,

the XY mode is available only when the XY function is enabled.

6. Common Tools Keys

Quick Start

- is the auto scale key. Press this key to enable the auto scale function.

The oscilloscope is automatically configured to best display the input signals by

adjusting the vertical scale, horizontal timebase, and trigger mode. To set up

the key, please refer to

Auto Config

is the RUN/STOP key. Press the key to set the oscilloscope's run state to

"RUN" or "STOP". In "RUN" state, this key is illuminated in green; in "STOP"

state, this key is illuminated in red.

is the key for a single acquisition. Press this key to set the oscilloscope's

trigger mode to "Single".

is the default setup key. Press this key twice to directly restore the

oscilloscope's default settings. You can also press the key and a dialog box is

displayed. Click or tap

OK in the dialog to restore the oscilloscope's default

settings.

is the clear key. Press this key to clear all waveform on the display. If

the oscilloscope is in "RUN" mode, it continues to display new waveforms.

7. Touch Lock Key

is the touch lock key. Press this key once to disable the touch screen

function; press it again to enable the touch screen.

8. Quick Action Key

Press to perform the selected quick action: print screen, save wave, save

setup, measure all, statistics reset, waveform record, or save group. To set up the

key, please refer to

Quick Action Settings

9. Trigger Controls

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

- is the trigger setup key. Press this key to access the Trigger

menu. For details, please refer to

Triggering the Oscilloscope

is the trigger slope setup key. Press this key to select the

edge type (rising edge, falling edge, or either edge). This key is

not active when the trigger type is not set to "Edge".

is the force trigger key. Press this key to force a trigger.

LEVEL is the trigger level/digital threshold knob. Turn the

knob clockwise to increase the trigger level or turn the knob

counterclockwise to decrease the level. Pressing the knob can

quickly set the trigger level to the waveform's 50% peak-to-peak

value.

10. Horizontal Controls

- Horizontal POSITION is the horizontal position knob.

Turn the knob to change the horizontal position (trigger

position) to move the waveforms horizontally. Press the

knob to reset the horizontal position to default.

- Horizontal

SCALE is the horizontal scale knob. Turn the

knob to change the horizontal time/div setting to compress

or expand waveforms of all channels horizontally. Press this

knob to toggle between fine and coarse adjustment for

horizontal time base or enable/disable the Zoom mode

(related to

Fine/Zoom

)

is the horizontal menu key. Press this key to access

the Horizontal menu in which you can set the horizontal

system and acquisition system.

is the Navigate key. Press this key to access the

Navigation menu. You can navigate time, search events, or

segments. For details, please refer to

Navigation

are the navigation keys. You can use the

keys to navigate time, search events, or segments. You can

also use the keys to play recorded waveforms.

11. Vertical Controls

Quick Start

- is the Math key. Press this key to access the Math menu. Math

operations include A+B, A-B, A×B, A/B, FFT, etc. You can also set the Math label.

is the reference key. Press this key to assess the Ref menu, in which you

can add reference waveforms in waveform view and compare them with

measured waveforms to identify circuit fault.

is the logic analyzer key. When a digital channel probe is connected,

press this key to enable/disable digital channels. When a digital channel is

enabled, press this key to open the logic analyzer menu. In this menu, you can

enable or disable any digital channel, modify the waveform sizes of the digital

channel, modify the threshold of the digital channel, and set digital channel

labels.

is the AFG key (for DHO914S and DHO924S only). Press this key to

enable/disable the AFG output. When the AFG output is enabled, press this key

to open the AFG setting menu. In this menu, you can set the AFG waveform

parameters and enable/disable the waveform output.

- Vertical

POSITION is the vertical position knob. Turn this knob to change

the selected waveform's vertical position to move the waveform up or down on

the display. Press this knob to reset the vertical position to zero.

- Vertical

SCALE is the vertical scale knob. Rotate this knob to modify the

value of vertical divisions of the graticule in volts/div to increase or decrease the

display amplitude of the waveform. Press this knob to toggle between fine and

coarse adjustment of the vertical scale.

/ / / is the channel key. Depending on the actual

situation, press the key to enable (display), select, or disable the corresponding

channel, as described below:

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

- If the channel is not displayed, you can press the channel key to open the

channel in the waveform view window.

- If the channel is displayed but not selected, you can press the channel key to

select the channel.

- If the channel is both displayed and selected, you can press the channel key

to close its display in the waveform view.

12. Probe Compensation Signal Output Terminal/Ground Terminal

This terminal outputs the probe compensation signal which helps you match a

probe's input capacitance to the oscilloscope channel to which it is connected.

13. Analog Channel Input Terminals

BNC connectors. Attach probes to these connectors for analog signal inputs.

14. Digital Channel Input Terminal

Attach logic probes to the interface for digital signal inputs.

15. USB HOST Port

This series supports USB storage device of FAT32/NTFS format and mouse.

- USB storage device: imports or exports data (software update, waveform,

setup, or captured image).

- Mouse: connects a mouse to control the instrument.

16. Power Key

Powers on/off the oscilloscope.

Quick Start

4.4.2 Rear Panel Overview

Figure 4.11 Rear Panel

1. AUX OUT

- Trigger output:

After the AUX output is set to "TrigOut", the oscilloscope generates a trigger

and outputs a signal that can reflect the current capture rate of the oscilloscope

via this interface. Connect the signal to a waveform display device and measure

the frequency of the signal. The measurement result is the same as the current

capture rate.

- Pass/Fail:

After the AUX output is set to "PassFail", in the pass/fail test, the instrument will

output a pulse via the [AUX OUT] connector when a passed or failed waveform

is detected during the pass/fail test.

2. AFG OUT (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

DHO914S and DHO924S have a built-in AFG. When the AFG output is enabled, the

rear-panel [AFG OUT] connector will output signals according to current settings.

3. LAN

Connect the instrument to network via this interface. The instrument conforms to

the standards specified in LXI Device Specification 2011. Its test system can be

built quickly. Then you can control the instrument through using Web Control to

send the SCPI commands. When update is available, you can perform online

upgrading for the system software of the instrument via the LAN interface.

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

4. USB DEVICE

Connect the instrument to the PC via this interface. Then you can use the PC

software to send the SCPI commands or use the user-defined programming to

control the instrument.

5. HDMI

You can connect the instrument to an external display that has the HDMI interface

(e.g. monitor or projector) via this interface to better observe the waveform display

clearly. At this time, you can also view the waveforms on the LCD of the

instrument.

6. USB Type-C Power Connector

The power requirements of the oscilloscope are DC, 12 V, 4 A. Please use the

power adaptor provided in the accessories to connect the oscilloscope to the AC

power source (100 V to 240 V, 50 Hz to 60 Hz).

7. Security Lock Hole

Use a standard PC/laptop lock cable to secure the oscilloscope to a work bench or

other location.

8. Ground Terminal

Connect the instrument chassis to the ground using the lead.

9. Mounting Screws

Interval of screw holes: 100 mm x 100 mm. Use screws to secure the oscilloscope

to the bracket with the same screw hole interval.

Quick Start

4.4.3 User Interface Overview

Figure 4.12 User Interface

1. Waveform View

Displays the measurement waveform window for CH1-CH4. Click or tap

at the

upper-right corner of the window to close the window; click or tap

to enter

the configuration menu of the specified function.

2. Run State Label

Displays the operating status of the instrument. Possibles states include RUN,

STOP, T'D, WAIT, and AUTO.

3. Horizontal Timebase Label

Displays the current horizontal time base. Click or tap this label to enter the

horizontal setting menu.

4. Sample Rate & Memory Depth Label

Displays the current sample rate and memory depth. Click or tap this label to enter

the horizontal setting menu.

5. Horizontal Position Label

Displays the current horizontal position. Click or tap this label to enter the

horizontal setting menu.

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

6. Trigger Label

- Displays the trigger information of the system, including the trigger type,

trigger level, trigger mode, and etc.

- Click or tap the trigger label, then the trigger setting window is displayed. You

can set the parameters for the trigger.

7. Function Toolbar

Provides

STOP/RUN, Default, Measure, Flex Knob, Windows, Cursors, Math, XY,

Storage, Counter, DVM, Decode, Record, and Navigate keys.

8. Result Sidebar

Displays the measurement results and statistics of various functions. Click or tap

at the lower-right corner of the screen to open or close the "Result" sidebar.

9. Split-screen Display

If you enable multiple functions, multiple windows can be displayed on the screen

at one time.

10. Notification Area

Displays USB icon, LAN icon, sound icon, and remote control icon. You can click or

tap this area to open the "Utility" menu.

- USB storage device icon: When a USB storage device is detected,

will be

displayed.

- LAN icon: When the LAN interface is successfully connected,

is displayed.

- Sound icon: In the "Utility" menu, click or tap Setup > Beeper to enable or

disable the sound. When on,

will be displayed; when off, will be

displayed. You can simply click or tap the icon to enable or disable the sound.

- Remote control icon: When you use Web Control to control the instrument

remotely,

will be displayed.

11. Math Labels

- Displays the on/off states of Math1-Math4.

- Click or tap

M1-M4 labels to display the on/off state, operation type, and

vertical scale for Math1-Math4.

12. AFG Label (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

Quick Start

Displays the on/off state, waveform type, amplitude, and frequency for AFG. Click

or tap the label to enable/disable the AFG output. When the AFG output is

enabled, click or tap this label to open the AFG setting menu.

13. Digital Channel Label

Displays the on/off state of each digital channel. Click or tap the label to enable/

disable all digital channels. When the a digital channel is enabled, click or tap this

label to enter the logic analyzer (LA) setting menu.

14. Channel Labels

- Display the channel on/off status.

- Display the channel coupling mode.

- Display the vertical scale.

- Display the vertical offset.

- Click or tap the label to enable/disable the corresponding channel or open the

Vertical menu.

15. Function Navigation Icon

Click or tap the icon to open the function navigation menu in which you can

access the specified function menu by clicking or tapping the corresponding

function key.

4.5 Touch Screen Gestures

The instrument's large capacitive touch screen makes operation and configuration

easy and flexible. The highly sensitive user interface designed for touch has a strong

waveform display capability, bringing an extraordinary user experience. The actions

supported by the touch screen controls include tapping, pinching&stretching, as well

as dragging.

4.5.1 Tap

Use one finger to tap the symbol or characters on the screen slightly, as shown in

Figure 4.13

. With the Tap gesture, you can perform the following operations:

• Tap the menu displayed on the screen to operate on the menu.

• Tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the touch screen to

enable the function navigation.

• Tap the displayed numeric keypad to set the parameters.

• Tap the virtual keypad to set the filename.

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

• Tap the close button at the upper-right corner of the message box to close the

prompt window.

• Tap other windows on the touch screen and operate on the windows.

Figure 4.13 Tap Gesture

4.5.2 Drag

Use one finger to select the object, and then drag the object to a destination place, as

shown in the figure below. With the drag gesture, you can perform the following

operation:

• Drag the waveform to change its position or scale.

• Drag the window controls to change the position of the window (e.g. numeric

keypad).

• Drag the cursor to move the cursor.

• Drag the trigger cursor to change the trigger level.

• In multi-window display, drag one of the displayed windows to change its

position on the display.

Figure 4.14 Drag Gesture

Quick Start

4.5.3 Pinch&Stretch

Pinch or stretch two points on the screen with two fingers to zoom in or out the

waveform. To zoom in the waveform, first pinch the two fingers and then stretch the

fingers; to zoom out the waveform, first stretch the two fingers, and then pinch the

fingers together, as shown in the figure below. With the pinch&stretch gesture, you

can perform the following operation:

• Pinching&stretching in the horizontal direction can adjust the horizontal time

base of the waveform.

• Pinching&stretching in the vertical direction can adjust the vertical scale of the

waveform.

Figure 4.15 Pinch&Stretch Gesture

4.6 Parameter Setting Method

For this instrument, you can use the knob and touch screen to set parameters. The

common parameter setting methods are as follows:

• Method 1: Some parameters can be adjusted by rotating the knob on the front

panel.

• Method 2: Click or tap the input field of a specified parameter, then a virtual

keypad is displayed. Complete the parameter setting with the keypad.

Input Chinese and English Characters

When naming a label, this instrument supports Chinese/English input method. The

following part introduces how to input Chinese and English characters with the

Chinese/English input method.

• Input English Characters

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

Uppercase/Lowercase Switchover Name Input Area Virtual Keypad

Backspace Key

Confirm InputSpace Key

Switch to Numbers

And Symbols

Input Method

Switchover

Figure 4.16 English Input Interface

1. Select English input method

First check the input method type. If it shows "En/中", then go to Step 2; if it

shows "中/En", click or tap the input method switchover key to switch to "En/

中" (English input method).

2. Clear the name input area

If there is no character in the "Name Input Area", please go to the next step. If

there are characters in the "Name Input Area", click or tap the Backspace key

to delete all the characters from the "Name Input Area" in order.

3. Input the upper-case letter

If you want to input an upper-case letter, first use the Caps key to switch

between the upper-case and lower-case mode. If the Caps key is selected,

input the upper-case letter with the virtual keypad. If not, first click or tap the

Caps key to ensure it is selected, then input the upper-case letter. All the input

letters will be displayed in the "Name Input Area".

4. Input the lower-case letter

Refer to the operation specified in the previous step. If the Caps key is not

selected, directly input the lower-case letter.

5. Input numbers or symbols

If the letter keypad is displayed, you need to click or tap the numeric

switchover key to switch to the numeric keypad, and input numbers or

symbols with the numeric keypad. All the input letters will be displayed in the

"Name Input Area".

Quick Start

6. Modify or delete the unwanted characters that have been input

During the name input process, you can modify or delete the unwanted

character if necessary. To delete the characters that have been input, click or

tap the Backspace key in the virtual keypad to delete the characters. To

modify the characters that have been input, delete the unwanted characters

first and then input the new characters.

You can directly move the cursor to the character to be modified or deleted,

delete the desired character or input the new characters after deleting the

unwanted character.

7. Confirm the input

After completing the input operation, click or tap "OK".

• Input Chinese Characters

Pinyin Input Area

Chinese Character

Selection Area

Figure 4.17 Chinese Input Interface

1. Select Chinese input method

First check the input method type. If it shows "中/En", then go to Step 2; if it

shows "En/中", click or tap the input method switchover key to switch to

"中/En" (Chinese input method).

2. Clear the name input area

If there is no character in the "Name Input Area", please go to the next step. If

there are characters in the "Name Input Area", click or tap the Backspace key

to delete all the characters from the "Name Input Area" in order.

If there are characters in the "Pinyin Input Area", when you delete characters

from the name input area, the characters in the Pinyin input area will be

deleted first.

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

3. Input Chinese characters

Click or tap the characters in the virtual keypad to input Pinyin into the input

area, then the characters to be selected will be displayed in the Chinese

character selection area. Slide to view more Chinese characters for you to

choose. Select the desired Chinese character, and then the selected character

will be displayed in the input area.

4. Modify or delete the unwanted characters that have been input

During the name input process, you can modify or delete the unwanted

character if necessary. To delete the characters that have been input, click or

tap the Backspace key in the virtual keypad to delete the characters. To

modify the characters that have been input, delete the unwanted characters

first and then input the new characters.

5. Confirm the input

After completing the input operation, click or tap "OK".

Input a String

When naming a file or folder, you need to input a string with the string keypad.

Uppercase/Lowercase Switchover Name Input Area Virtual Keypad

Backspace Key

Confirm InputSpace KeySwitch to Numbers and Symbols

Figure 4.18 String Keypad

1. Clear the name input area

If there is no character in the "Name Input Area", please go to the next step. If

there are characters in the "Name Input Area", click or tap the Backspace key to

delete all the characters from the "Name Input Area" in order.

Quick Start

2. Input the upper-case letter

If you want to input an upper-case letter, first use the Caps key to switch between

the upper-case and lower-case mode. If the Caps key is selected, input the upper-

case letter with the virtual keypad. If not, first click or tap the Caps key to ensure it

is selected, then input the upper-case letter. All the input letters will be displayed

in the "Name Input Area".

3. Input the lower-case letter

Refer to the operation specified in the previous step. If the Caps key is not

selected, directly input the lower-case letter.

4. Input numbers or symbols

If the letter keypad is displayed, you need to click or tap the numeric switchover

key to switch to the numeric keypad, and input numbers or symbols with the

numeric keypad. All the input letters will be displayed in the "Name Input Area".

5. Modify or delete the unwanted characters that have been input

During the name input process, you can modify or delete the unwanted character

if necessary. To delete the characters that have been input, click or tap the

Backspace key in the virtual keypad to delete the characters. To modify the

characters that have been input, delete the unwanted characters first and then

input the new characters.

You can directly move the cursor to the character to be modified or deleted, delete

the desired character or input the new characters after deleting the unwanted

character.

6. Confirm the input

After completing the input operation, click or tap "OK".

Input a Value

When setting or modifying a parameter, input an appropriate value with the numeric

keypad.

• Click or tap the value or unit in the numeric keypad to complete the input.

• Rotate the multipurpose knob (1/2) to move the cursor to select the desired

value and unit. Press the knob to confirm the input.

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

Delete Key

Max. Value

Min. Value

Default Key

Clear Key

UnitTen to the Nth Power Confirmation Key

Cursor

Figure 4.19 Numeric Keypad

After you input all the values and select the desired units, the numeric keypad is

turned off automatically. This indicates that you have completed parameter setting.

Besides, after you have input the values, you can also click or tap "OK" directly to

close the numeric keypad. At this time, the unit of the parameter is the default unit. In

the numeric keypad, you can perform the following operations:

• Modify the parameter value that has been input;

• Set the parameter value to a maximum or minimum value;

• Set the parameter to a default value;

• Clear the parameter input field.

4.7 To Use the Security Lock

If necessary, you can lock the instrument to a fixed location by using the security lock

(please purchase it by yourself), as shown in the figure below.

The method is as follows: align the lock with the lock hole and plug it into the lock

hole vertically, turn the key clockwise to lock the oscilloscope, and then pull the key

out.

Quick Start

Security Lock Hole

Figure 4.20 To Use the Security Lock

CAUTION

Please do not insert other objects into the security lock hole to avoid damaging the

instrument.

4.8 To Use the Built-in Help System

The built-in help file provides information about the functions and menu

introductions of the instrument. Click or tap

> Help to enter the help system.

In the help system, you can get its help information by clicking on or tapping the link

for the specified chapter.

Quick Start

DHO900 User Guide

Vertical System

This series oscilloscope provides 4 analog input channels (CH1-CH4), and each

channel is equipped with an independent vertical control system. The setting

methods for their vertical systems are the same. This chapter takes CH1 as an

example to introduce the setting method for the vertical system.

When a channel is selected, click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the

screen. Then the menu as shown in the figure below is displayed.

Figure 5.1 Vertical Menu

5.1 To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel

Enable the Analog Channel

When a signal is connected to CH1, you can enable the channel in the following ways.

• Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen to enable the

channel.

• Press the front-panel

key to enable the channel, and the backlight of this

key is illuminated.

• In

Figure 5.1

, select the CH1 tab. Click or tap the Display on/off switch to turn

CH1 on or off.

When CH1 is activated, its status label at the bottom of the screen is as shown in the

figure below.

Vertical System

The information displayed in the channel status label is related to the current channel

setting (irrelevant with the on/off status of the channel). After the channel is turned

on, modify the parameters such as the vertical scale, horizontal time base, trigger

mode, and trigger level according to the input signal for easy observation and

measurement of the waveform.

When CH1 is enabled but not activated, its status label is as shown in the following

figure.

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen or press the front-

panel

key to activate CH1. You can also select the CH1 tab in Vertical menu to

activate it.

Disable the Analog Channel

You can disable the analog channel in the following ways.

• If CH1 has been enabled and activated, you can press the front-panel

key

to disable it directly. You can also click or tap the channel status label at the

bottom of the screen to open the Vertical menu and then click or tap the label

again to disable the channel.

• If CH1 has been enabled but not activated, first activate the channel. Then press

the front-panel

key or use the channel status label to disable CH1.

• In

Figure 5.1

, set Display to OFF to disable CH1.

• In addition, you can slide down the channel label to disable the channel.

If CH1 is disabled, its status label is as shown in the figure below.

5.2 To Adjust the Vertical Scale

Vertical scale indicates the voltage value per grid in the vertical axis of the screen. It is

often expressed in V/div. Adjusting the vertical scale increases or decreases the

Vertical System

DHO900 User Guide

display amplitude of the waveform. The scale information of the channel status label

at the bottom of the screen would change accordingly.

Vertical

Scale

The adjustable range of the vertical scale is related to the current probe ratio. By

default, the probe ratio is 1X. In this case, the adjustable range of the vertical scale is

from 200 μV/div to 10 V/div.

When CH1 is turned on and activated, you can adjust the vertical scale in the

following ways.

• Rotate the Vertical

SCALE knob to adjust the vertical scale (clockwise to

reduce the scale and counterclockwise to increase).

• Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the vertical scale with the

pinch & stretch gesture on the touch screen. For details, refer to descriptions in

Pinch&Stretch

• In the

Vertical menu, click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Scale to increase or decrease the scale value or use the corresponding

multipurpose knob on the front panel to set the value. You can also click or tap

the input field to input a specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

Input Field

Increase

Decrease

In the Vertical menu, click or tap the Fine on/off switch to toggle between ON (fine

adjustment) and

OFF (coarse adjustment). The default setting is OFF. You can also

press the Vertical

SCALE knob to toggle between "coarse adjustment" and "fine

adjustment".

• Fine adjustment: Use the icons at the right side of Scale or rotate the knob to

further adjust the vertical scale within a relatively smaller range to improve

vertical resolution. If the amplitude of the input waveform is a little bit greater

than the full scale under the current scale and the amplitude would be a little bit

Vertical System

lower if the next scale is used, fine adjustment can be used to improve the

amplitude of waveform display to view signal details.

• Coarse adjustment: Use the icons at the right side of

Scale or rotate the knob to

adjust the vertical scale in a 1-2-5 step sequence, i.e. 200 μV/div, 500 μV/div, 1

mV/div, 2 mV/div, 5 mV/div, 10 mV/div...10 V/div.

5.3 To Adjust the Vertical Offset

Vertical offset indicates the offset of the signal ground level position of the waveform

from the vertical center of the display. Its unit is consistent with the currently selected

amplitude unit (refer to

To Specify the Amplitude Unit

). Adjusting the vertical offset

moves the corresponding channel's waveform up and down. The vertical offset

information (as shown in the following figure) in the channel status label at the

bottom of the screen will change accordingly.

Vertical

Offset

The adjustable range of the vertical offset is related to the current probe ratio and

vertical scale.

When CH1 is turned on and activated, you can adjust the vertical offset in the

following ways.

• Rotate the Vertical

POSITION knob at the right section of the front panel to

adjust the vertical offset within the adjustable range. Rotate this knob clockwise

to increase the vertical offset, and rotate it counterclockwise to reduce the

vertical offset. Pressing down the knob can quickly reset the vertical offset (set

the vertical offset to 0).

• Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the vertical offset with the

drag gesture. For details, refer to

Drag

• In the

Vertical menu, click or tap the Up/Down arrow icon at the right side of the

input field of

Offset to increase or decrease the offset value or use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. You can also click or tap the

input field to input a specific value with the pop-up numeric keypad.

Input Field

Decrease

Increase

Vertical System

DHO900 User Guide

5.4 To Specify Channel Coupling

You can remove unwanted signals by setting the coupling mode. For example, the

signal under test is a square waveform with DC offset.

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, and then the

Vertical menu is displayed. Click or tap the Coupling drop-down button to select the

coupling mode.

• When the coupling mode is "DC", both the DC and AC components of the signal

under test can pass the channel.

• When the coupling mode is "AC", the DC components of the signal under test

are blocked

• When the coupling mode is "GND", the DC and AC components of the signal

under test are blocked.

After a coupling mode is selected, it is indicated in the channel status label at the

bottom of the screen, as shown in the figure below.

GND

5.5 To Specify Bandwidth Limit

This oscilloscope supports the bandwidth limit function. Setting the bandwidth limit

can reduce the noises in the displayed waveforms. For example, the signal under test

is a pulse with high frequency oscillation.

• When the bandwidth limit is turned off, the high frequency components of the

signal under test can pass the channel.

• When the bandwidth limit is turned on, the high frequency components found in

the signal under test that are greater than the limit are attenuated. This series

supports 20 MHz bandwidth limit.

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, and then the

Vertical menu is displayed. Click or tap the BW Limit drop-down button to select the

specified bandwidth. When the bandwidth limit is enabled, the specific bandwidth

Vertical System

limit value will be displayed in the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, as

shown in the figure below.

TIP

Bandwidth limit can not only reduce the noise, but also can attenuate or eliminate the high

frequency components of the signal.

5.6 To Specify Input Impedance

This series oscilloscope provides 1 MΩ input impedance mode. In this mode, the

input impedance of the oscilloscope is very high, and the current flowed from the

circuit under test can be ignored.

5.7 To Invert a Waveform

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, and then the

Vertical menu is displayed. Then click or tap the Invert on/off switch to enable or

disable the waveform invert function.

When "ON" is selected, the channel label is as shown in the figure below.

When the Invert function is disabled, the waveform is displayed normally; when

enabled, the voltage values of the displayed waveform are inverted, as shown in the

figure below. Inverting a waveform also changes the result of math function,

waveform measurement, etc.

Vertical System

DHO900 User Guide

"Invert" On

"Invert" Off

Figure 5.2 Waveform Invert On/Off

TIP

When the Invert function is turned on, the trigger (e.g. Edge trigger, Pulse trigger, or Slope

trigger) edge or polarity will be changed.

5.8 To Set Probe

The analog channel of this oscilloscope supports passive probes. For detailed

technical information of the probes, please refer to the corresponding Probe User

Guide.

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. Then the

Vertical

menu is displayed. Then click or tap

Probe to enter the Probe setting menu, as shown

in the figure below.

Figure 5.3 Probe Setting Menu

Probe Ratio

The oscilloscope allows you to set the probe attenuation manually. To obtain the

accurate measurement results, you must set the probe ratio properly. By default, the

probe ratio is 1X.

The probe ratio values available are as shown in the following table.

Vertical System

Table 5.1 Probe Ratio

Attenuation

(display amplitude of the signal: actual

amplitude of the signal)

0.001X

0.002X

0.005X

0.01X

0.02X

0.05X

0.1X

0.2X

0.5X

1X (default)

10X

15X

20X

50X

100X

150X

200X

500X

1000X

1500X

2000X

5000X

10000X

15000X

20000X

0.001:1

0.002:1

0.005:1

0.01:1

0.02:1

0.05:1

0.1:1

0.2:1

0.5:1

1:1

2:1

5:1

10:1

15:1

20:1

50:1

100:1

150:1

200:1

500:1

1000:1

1500:1

2000:1

5000:1

10000:1

15000:1

20000:1

Vertical System

DHO900 User Guide

Attenuation

(display amplitude of the signal: actual

amplitude of the signal)

50000X 50000:1

TIP

The oscilloscope auto-recognizes certain probes with a fixed attenuation ratio. After that, the

probe ratio will also be auto recognized to save you from configuring it manually.

Go Back to the Vertical Menu

In the

Probe setting menu, click or tap Vertical to go back to the Vertical menu.

5.9 To Specify the Amplitude Unit

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, and then the

Vertical menu is displayed. Click or tap the Unit drop-down button to select W, A, V,

or U. The default unit is V.

Changing the amplitude unit also changes the units of the functions related to the

channel accordingly.

5.10 To Adjust Bias

When you use an oscilloscope to make actual measurements, a small offset that arises

from the temperature drift of the component or external environment disturbance

may occur on the zero-cross voltage of the channel, which will affect the

measurement results of the vertical parameters. This series oscilloscope allows you to

set an offset calibration voltage for calibrating the zero point of the corresponding

channel so as to improve the accuracy of the measurement results.

In the "Vertical" menu, click or tap the Up/Down arrow icon at the right side of the

input field of

Bias to increase or decrease the bias value. You can click or tap the input

field to set the value with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

Value Input Area

Decrease Increase

Vertical System

The range of bias is related to the vertical scale.

TIP

If the zero-cross voltage of the channel has a larger amplitude offset that exceeds the

adjustable range, please perform self-calibration for the instrument to ensure the

measurement accuracy. For details, refer to

SelfCal

5.11 To Specify the Skew

When using an oscilloscope for actual measurement, the transmission delay of the

probe cable may bring relatively greater errors (zero offset). This series oscilloscope

allows you to set a delay time for calibrating the zero offset of the corresponding

channel. Zero offset is defined as the offset of the crossing point of the waveform and

trigger level line relative to trigger position, as shown in the figure below.

Zero Offset

Figure 5.4 Zero Offset

In the "Vertical" menu, click or tap the

Ch-Ch Skew input field to set the channel-to-

channel skew time. The available range is from -100 ns to 100 ns, and the default is

0.00 s.

5.12 To Turn the Channel Label Display On/Off

The instrument uses the channel number to mark the corresponding channel by

default. For ease of use, you can also set a label for each channel. For example,

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. Then the

Vertical

menu is displayed. Click or tap the

Label on/off switch to turn the label display on or

off. You can also click or tap the label input field to input a specific name for the

channel label with the pop-up keypad.

Vertical System

DHO900 User Guide

For how to use the keypad, refer to descriptions in

Parameter Setting Method

Vertical System

Horizontal System

You can access the Horizontal menu in the following ways.

• Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, and then the

Vertical menu is displayed. Click or tap the Acquisition button to enter the

Horizontal menu.

• Click or tap the horizontal time base label ("H" icon), acquisition label ("A" icon),

or horizontal position label ("D" icon) at the top of the screen to enter the

Horizontal menu.

Horizontal Time Base

Sample Rate Horizontal Position

• Press the front-panel key to enter the Horizontal menu.

Figure 6.1 Horizontal Menu

6.1 To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base

Horizontal time base, also called the horizontal scale, refers to the time of each grid in

the horizontal direction of the screen. It is usually expressed in s/div. The range of the

horizontal time base is from 2.00 ns/div to 500 s/div.

While you change the horizontal time base, the displayed waveforms of all channels

are expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the selected time reference

(

Horizontal Expansion Reference

). The horizontal time base in the horizontal time

base label ("H" icon) will change accordingly, as shown in the figure below.

Horizontal System

DHO900 User Guide

You can adjust the horizontal time base in the following ways.

• Rotate the front-panel Horizontal

SCALE knob to adjust the horizontal time

base (clockwise to decrease the scale and counterclockwise to increase).

• Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the horizontal time base with

the Pinch&Stretch gesture. For details, refer to

Pinch&Stretch

• In the

Horizontal menu, click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Scale to increase or decrease the horizontal time base or use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. You can also click or tap the input field to

input a specific value with the pop-up numeric keypad.

Input Field

Increase

Decrease

In the

Horizontal menu, click or tap the Vernier on/off switch to toggle between ON

(fine adjustment) and OFF (coarse adjustment). You can also press the front-panel

Horizontal

SCALE knob to toggle between "coarse adjustment" and "fine

adjustment".

• Coarse adjustment: Click or tap the icons at the right side of the input field of

Scale to adjust the horizontal time base of the waveforms of all channels in a

1-2-5 step sequence within the adjustable range.

• Fine adjustment: Click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Scale

to adjust the horizontal time base of the waveforms of all channels at a smaller

step within the adjustable range.

6.2 To Adjust the Horizontal Position

Horizontal position, also called trigger position, refers to the trigger point position of

the waveforms of all channels in the horizontal direction relative to the center of the

display. When the waveform trigger point is at the left (right) side of the center, the

horizontal position is a positive (negative) value.

Changing the horizontal position moves the waveform trigger points and the

displayed waveforms of all channels horizontally. The horizontal position displayed in

the horizontal position label ("D" icon) changes accordingly, as shown in the figure

below.

Horizontal System

You can adjust the horizontal position in the following ways.

• Rotate the Horizontal

POSITION knob at the right section of the front panel

to adjust the horizontal position within the adjustable range. Rotate this knob

clockwise to reduce the horizontal position or counterclockwise to increase the

horizontal position. Pressing the knob can quickly reset the horizontal position

(set the horizontal position to 0).

• Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the horizontal position with

the drag gesture. For details, refer to

Drag

• In the "Horizontal" menu, use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the

horizontal position or use the icons at the right side of the input field of

Position

to increase or decrease the value, as shown in the figure below. You can also click

or tap the

Position input field to input a specific value with the pop-up numeric

keypad.

Input Field

Increase

Decrease

6.3 Zoom Mode (Delayed Sweep)

Zoom (delayed sweep mode) can be used to horizontally expand a length of

waveform to view waveform details. In the

Horizontal menu, click or tap the Zoom

on/off switch to enable or disable the delayed sweep function. When it is enabled,

you can set the scale and position in Zoom mode.

Input Field for

Zoomed Time Base

Increase

Input Field for

Zoomed Position

Increase

Decrease

• Zoomed Scale: Rotate the corresponding multipurpose knob or use the icons at

the right side of the

Scale input field to increase or decrease the time base for

the Zoom window. You can also click or tap the input field to input the specific

value directly via the pop-up numeric keypad.

• Zoomed Position: Rotate the corresponding multipurpose knob or use the icons

at the right side of the

Position input field to increase or decrease the position

Horizontal System

DHO900 User Guide

for the Zoom window. You can also click or tap the input field to input the

specific value directly via the pop-up numeric keypad.

When the Zoom mode is enabled, the display divides in half, as shown in the figure

below.

Waveform before Expansion

Waveform after Expansion

Zoomed Time Base

Main Time Base

Zoomed Position

Figure 6.2 Zoom Mode

• Waveform before expansion:

The upper portion of the display that is not covered by subtransparent gray

shows the normal display of the waveform. Its horizontal time base (called the

main time base) is indicated in the label at the upper-left corner of the display.

You can move the area left and right by adjusting the horizontal position and

increase or decrease the size of the area by adjusting the horizontal scale.

• Waveform after expansion:

The lower portion shows the horizontally expanded version of the normal

waveform display. Its horizontal time base (called the zoomed time base) is

displayed in the middle. Compared with the main time base, the zoomed time

base has higher resolution.

TIP

The zoomed time base should be smaller than or equal to the main time base.

Horizontal System

Acquisition System

The "Horizontal" menu allows you to configure the instrument's acquisition system.

Figure 7.1 Horizontal Menu

7.1 Acquisition Mode

The acquisition mode is used to determine how the waveform points are calculated

from the sample points. In the

Horizontal menu, click or tap the desired acquisition

mode for the

Acquisition item. This oscilloscope provides four acquisition modes:

Normal (default), Average, Peak, and UltraAcquire. The selected acquisition mode is

indicated in the acquisition label ("A" icon) at the top of the screen

Acquisition

Mode

Normal

In Normal acquisition mode, the oscilloscope samples the signal at a fixed time

interval to rebuild the waveform. This mode produces the best display for most

waveforms.

Average

In this mode, the oscilloscope averages the waveforms from multiple acquisitions to

reduce the random noise of the input signal and increase the vertical resolution. A

greater number of averages lowers the noise and increases the vertical resolution. On

the other hand, the higher the number of averages, the slower the response of the

displayed waveform to waveform changes.

Acquisition System

DHO900 User Guide

When you select "Average" mode, click or tap the Averages input field to set the

number of averages with the pop-up numeric keypad or use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is from 2 to 65536, and the default is 2.

TIP

• The number of averages must be the Nth power of 2. When it is not in N power-of-2

increments, a prompt message "Truncation average error" is displayed. At this time, a

value that is smaller than the one you input and the closest to N power-of-2 increments

will be input automatically.

• The "Average" mode and the digital channel function are mutually exclusive. You cannot

enable the two function at the same time.

Peak

In this mode, the oscilloscope acquires the maximum and minimum values of the

signal within the acquisition interval to get the signal envelope or capture narrow

pulses that might be lost. This mode prevents signal aliasing at the expense of

exaggerating the noise.

In this mode, the minimum pulse width detected is the sample period.

UltraAcquire

UltraAcquire mode is one of the fast acquisition modes. It divides the oscilloscope's

memory into segments and fills a memory segment for each individual trigger event.

It provides a much higher waveform capture rate and helps minimize the dead time

between trigger events.

When you select "UltraAcquire" mode, click or tap the

Display Frame input field to

set the number of frames and the

Timeout input field to set the timeout. When the

number of the frames reaches the maximum or the sampling time reaches the

timeout, the oscilloscope stops sampling and plots the waveform. Click or tap the

Display mode drop-down button to select the display mode of the acquired data.

• Adjacent: Waveform segments are shown in an adjacent way with each segment

shown next to the previous segment in time order. A maximum of 100 frames

can be displayed on the screen at a time in this mode.

• Overlay: All the captured waveform segments are overwritten to display as one

single segment of the waveform. A maximum of 100 frames can be displayed on

the screen at a time in this mode.

• Waterfall: It displays the captured waveform segments in a cascaded display

order. A maximum of 100 frames can be displayed on the screen at a time in this

mode.

• Perspective: The waveform segments are displayed in the ladder-like form, with

each segment being arranged above another with a certain perspective (angle),

moving up like a rising slope. A maximum of 100 frames can be displayed on the

screen at a time in this mode.

Acquisition System

• Mosaic: The whole waveform view is divided into several blocks, and each

waveform segment is displayed in each block in sequence. A maximum of 80

frames can be displayed on the screen at a time in this mode.

Figure 7.2 Display Modes

TIP

• The UltraAcquire mode is not available when any of the following functions is enabled:

cursors, decoding, Search, Zoom, Pass/Fail test, waveform recording, reference waveform,

roll mode, slow sweep mode, and XY mode. To switch to the UltraAcquire mode, please

ensure that all of those functions are disabled.

• In UltraAcquire mode, the functions mentioned above (except for roll mode and slow

sweep mode) are disabled. When roll mode or slow sweep mode is enabled, the

acquisition mode is automatically switched to "Normal".

7.2 Sampling Mode

This oscilloscope only supports the real-time sampling mode. In this mode, the

oscilloscope produces the waveform display from samples collected during one

trigger event. The maximum real-time sample rate of this series is 1.25 GSa/s. The

current sample rate is displayed in the acquisition label at the top of the screen.

By default, the operating status label at the left top of the screen is illuminated in

green, indicating that the instrument is in real-time sampling, and the STOP/RUN

button on the toolbar is in green. Click or tap the

STOP/RUN button or press the

front-panel

key to stop sampling. At this time, the operating status label shows

"STOP" in red, and the

STOP/RUN button turns red. Also, the backlight of the front-

panel

key turns red. The oscilloscope will maintain its last captured graph. You

can still pan or zoom the waveforms by using the horizontal/vertical controls.

Acquisition System

DHO900 User Guide

7.3 Sample Rate

Sampling is the process of converting an analog signal into digital data at a specified

time interval and then storing them sequentially in acquisition memory. The sample

rate is the reciprocal of the time interval.

Horizontal menu, the "SaRate" item shows the current sample rate. The current

sample rate is also indicated in the acquisition label ("A" icon) at the top of the

screen, as shown in the figure below.

Sample Rate

Sample Interval

The sample rate of the analog channel is related to the current channel mode. This

series oscilloscope provides up to 1.25 GSa/s real-time sample rate in single channel

mode, 625 MSa/s real-time sample rate in half channels mode, and 312.5 Msa/s real-

time sample rate in all channels mode.

• Single channel mode: If any one of the channels is enabled, it is called single

channel mode.

• Half channels mode: If two of the channels are enabled, it is called half channels

mode.

• All channels mode: If any three channels or all four channels are enabled, it is

called all channels mode.

A sample rate that is too low might have the following effects on the waveform:

• Waveform Distortion: When the sample rate is too low, some waveform details

are lost, and the sample waveform displayed is rather different from the actual

waveform of the signal.

• Waveform Aliasing: Aliasing occurs when the sample rate is twice lower than

the actual signal frequency (Nyquist Frequency). The frequency of the waveform

reconstructed from the sample data is smaller than the actual signal frequency.

Acquisition System

• Waveform Leakage: If the sample rate is too low, the waveform reconstructed

from the sample data does not represent the original signal correctly.

7.4 Memory Depth

Memory depth refers to the number of points that the oscilloscope can store in a

single trigger acquisition. It reflects the storage capability of the acquisition memory.

DHO900 series oscilloscope provides up to 50 Mpts memory depth (standard).

Pre-Sample Delayed Sample

Memory Depth

Trigger Point

Figure 7.3 Memory Depth

The following formula shows the relations among memory depth, sample rate, and

horizontal time base:

Acquisition System

DHO900 User Guide

MDepth ≥ SRate x TSCale x HDivs

•

MDepth

indicates the memory depth. The unit is pts.

•

SRate

indicates the sample rate. The unit is Sa/s.

•

TSCale

indicates the horizontal time base. The unit is s/div.

•

HDivs

indicates the number of grids in the horizontal direction. The unit is div.

Therefore, with the same horizontal time base, a higher memory depth can ensure a

higher sample rate.

In Horizontal menu, click or tap the Mem Depth drop-down button to select the

memory depth. The default setting is "10k". The selected memory depth value is

displayed in the acquisition label ("A" icon) at the top of the screen.

Memory

Depth

• When only one of the four channels (CH1-CH4) is enabled, the memory depths

available include Auto, 1 kpts, 10 kpts, 100 kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 25 Mpts, and

50 Mpts.

• When two of the four channels (CH1-CH4) are enabled, the memory depths

available include Auto, 1 kpts, 10 kpts, 100 kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, and 25 Mpts.

• When three channels or all four channels are enabled, the memory depths

available include Auto, 1 kpts, 10 kpts, 100 kpts, 1 Mpts, and 10 Mpts.

TIP

• In "Auto" mode, the oscilloscope selects the memory depth automatically according to

the current sample rate.

• When

Acquisition Mode

is set to "Average", the maximum memory depth available is 10

Mpts in single channel mode and 1 Mpts in half channels mode/all channels mode.

7.5 Horizontal Expansion Reference

This function allows you to set the position that the waveform on the display is

referenced to when it is horizontally expanded or compressed when the horizontal

time base is adjusted. In the

Horizontal menu, click or tap the Expand drop-down

button to select the reference position. Available options include Center (default),

Left, Right, Trigger, and User.

• Center: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be

expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the center of the display.

• Left: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be expanded

or compressed horizontally relative to the leftmost position of the display.

Acquisition System

• Right: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be

expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the rightmost position of the

display.

• Trigger: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be

expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the trigger point.

• User: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be expanded

or compressed horizontally relative to the user-defined reference position.

When you select "User", click or tap the

User Expansion input field and set the

value with the displayed numeric keypad. Its range is from -500 to 500, and the

default is 0.

7.6 Roll Mode

The roll mode causes the waveform to move across the screen from right to left. It

allows you to view the acquired data without waiting for a complete acquisition. In

Horizontal menu, select "Auto" or "OFF" in Roll.

• Auto: the Roll mode is enabled. It is automatically enabled when the horizontal

scale is 50 ms/div or slower.

• OFF: the Roll mode is disabled. The oscilloscope operates at slow sweep speeds

when the horizontal scale is 200 ms/div or slower. The slow sweep mode is not

available for digital channels. In slow sweep mode, the oscilloscope acquires the

data to the left of the trigger point and then waits for trigger. After the trigger

occurs, it continues to acquire the data to the right of the trigger point. When

you use this mode to observe low-frequency signals, it is recommended to set

the channel coupling mode (

To Specify Channel Coupling

) to "DC".

TIP

• If the Zoom mode is currently turned on, enabling the roll mode automatically turns off

the Zoom mode.

• The following functions are not available when the roll mode is enabled:

To Adjust the Horizontal Position

(available when the oscilloscope run state is STOP),

Zoom Mode (Delayed Sweep)

Triggering the Oscilloscope

Protocol Decoding

Pass/Fail

Test

Waveform Recording and Playing

Persistence Time

UltraAcquire

Average

Mode

Digital Channel

7.7 XY Mode

By default, this series oscilloscope uses the YT mode for waveform display window. In

YT mode, Y-axis indicates the Voltage and X-axis indicates the Time. Besides, it also

supports the XY display in which both X-axis and Y-axis indicate voltage. The XY

mode converts the oscilloscope from a "Voltage-Time" display to a "Voltage-Voltage"

display using two input channels.

Acquisition System

DHO900 User Guide

Enable the XY Mode

You can enable the XY display mode in the following ways.

• Click or tap the

Windows button in the function navigation menu or on the

toolbar to enter the

Add Window menu. In the "Diagram" item, click or tap XY >

Add to enable the XY display mode.

• Click or tap the

XY button in the function navigation menu or on the toolbar to

enable the XY display mode.

• In the "Horizontal" menu, tick

XY to enable the XY mode.

Configure the XY Mode

Click or tap

at the upper-right corner of the XY display window to enter the XY

configuration menu.

Figure 7.4 XY Menu

• Source: Click or tap the drop-down button of "Source X" to select the source

channel of the X-axis in the XY window. Click or tap the drop-down button of

"Source Y" to select the source channel of the Y-axis in the XY window.

In the

Add Window menu, you can also configure Source Z. Source Z, as the Z-

axis input in the XY display mode, is used to control whether to display the X-Y

waveforms in the XY display mode. This function is called "blanking".

- When "None" is selected for "Source Z", the blanking function is disabled,

and you can only see the X-Y waveforms.

Acquisition System

- When you select "CH1-CH4" for "Source Z", the blanking function is

enabled. The Z-axis input from the external connector determines whether

to display the X-Y waveforms. When Z is high (the input level is greater than

0 V), the X-Y waveforms are displayed; when Z is low (the input level is

smaller than 0 V), the waveforms are hidden.

• Grid: Please refer to

To Set the Screen Grid

NOTE

Advanced settings are not available for now. The current settings can produce the best display.

Phase Deviation Measurement

In this mode, you can use the Lissajous method to measure the phase deviation of the

two input signals whose frequencies are the same. The following figure shows the

measurement schematic diagram of phase deviation.

Figure 7.5 Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation

According to sinƟ=A/B or C/D, Ɵ is the phase deviation angle between the two

channels. The definitions of A, B, C, and D are shown in the figure above. The phase

deviation angle is obtained, that is:

Ɵ=±arcsin(A/B) or ±arcsin(C/D)

If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant I and III, the phase deviation

angle obtained should be within Quadrant I and IV, namely within (0 to π/2) or (3π/2

to 2π). If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant II and IV, the phase

deviation angle obtained should be within Quadrant II and III, namely within (π/2 to

π) or (π to 3π/2).

The XY mode can be used to measure the phase deviation occurred when the signal

under test passes through a circuit network. Connect the oscilloscope to the circuit to

monitor the input and output signals of the circuit.

Acquisition System

DHO900 User Guide

Triggering the Oscilloscope

The trigger system allows you to set specific trigger conditions as required. The

oscilloscope captures a waveform as well as its neighboring part and displays them

on the screen once a particular trigger condition is met. For a digital oscilloscope, it

samples waveform continuously no matter whether it is stably triggered. Rather, only

stable triggering can produce stable display. The trigger module ensures that every

time base sweep or acquisition starts from the user-defined trigger condition, namely

every sweep is synchronous with the acquisition and the waveforms acquired are

overlapped so as to display the stable waveforms.

You should set the triggers based on the features of the input signal. To quickly

capture your desired waveforms, you need to understand the signal under test. This

oscilloscope provides a variety of trigger types that help you focus on the desired

waveform details.

You can enter the

Trigger menu in the following ways.

• Press the front-panel

key to enter the trigger menu.

• In

Figure 5.1

, click or tap the Trigger button to enter the trigger menu.

• Click or tap the trigger label (as shown in the figure below) at the top of the

screen to enter the trigger menu.

8.1 Trigger Source

In the "Trigger" menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the

desired source. Available sources include analog channels CH1-CH4 and digital

channels D0-D15 (available only when the digital channel probe is connected).

Analog Channel Input

Signals input from analog channels CH1-CH4 can all be used as trigger sources. No

matter whether the channel selected is enabled, the channel can work normally.

Digital Channel Input

When the digital channel probe is connected, signals input from digital channels D0-

D15 can all be used as trigger sources. No matter whether the channel selected is

enabled, the channel can work normally.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

8.2 Trigger Level

The adjustment of the trigger level/threshold level is related to the type of the trigger

source.

• When the trigger source is CH1-CH4, rotate the front-panel

LEVEL knob or

use the corresponding multipurpose knob (when the trigger menu is opened) to

adjust the trigger level. You can also click or tap the Level input field to set the

value with the pop-up numeric keypad. During the adjustment, a trigger level

line (the color of the trigger level line is the same as that of the channel) and a

trigger icon " " are displayed on the screen, and they move up and down

with the variation of the trigger level. When you stopping modifying the trigger

level, the trigger level line disappears in about 2 s. The current trigger level is

displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

In Runt Trigger, Slope Trigger, and Window trigger, you need to set the upper

and lower limits of the trigger level. Two trigger level icons and are

displayed at the right section of the screen.

• When the trigger source is D0-D15, rotate the front-panel

LEVEL knob or

use the corresponding multipurpose knob (when the trigger menu is opened) to

adjust the threshold level. You can also click or tap the input field to set the

value with the pop-up numeric keypad. In addition, you can set the threshold

level for digital channels in the LA menu as shown in

Figure 12.1

. For details,

refer to

To Set the Threshold

. The current threshold level is displayed in the

trigger information label at the top of the screen.

To better trigger the waveforms, for a trigger with a single level, you can directly click

or tap

50% in the menu or press the trigger level knob to make the level move to the

middle of the waveform. However, for a trigger with two levels (e.g. Slope trigger,

Runt trigger, Window trigger), you need to click or tap

90% for Level A and 10% for

Level B to make the level move within the range of the waveform amplitude.

8.3 Trigger Mode

The following is the schematic diagram of the acquisition memory. To better

understand the trigger event, you can think of the trigger event as dividing

acquisition memory into a pre-trigger and post-trigger buffer.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Pre-trigger Buffer Post-trigger Buffer

Trigger Event

Acquisition Memory

Figure 8.1 Schematic Diagram of the Acquisition Memory

After the oscilloscope starts running, it first fills the pre-trigger buffer. Then, after the

pre-trigger buffer is filled, the oscilloscope starts searching for a trigger. While

searching for the trigger, the data sampled will still be transmitted to the pre-trigger

buffer (the new data will continuously overwrite the previous data). When a trigger is

found, the pre-trigger buffer contains the events that occurred just before the trigger.

Then, the oscilloscope will fill the post-trigger buffer and display the data in the

acquisition memory. If the acquisition is initiated via the front-panel

key, the

process repeats; if the acquisition is initiated via the

key, it stops after finishing

a single acquisition (you can pan and zoom the currently displayed waveform).

This series provides Auto (default), Normal, and Single trigger modes.

Click or tap the trigger information label (as shown in the figure below) at the top of

the screen or press the front-panel

key to open the "Trigger" menu. In the

Sweep item, you can quickly switch the current trigger mode. The selected trigger

mode is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen: A (Auto), N

(Normal), or S (Single).

• Auto: In this trigger mode, if the specified trigger conditions are not found,

triggers are forced and acquisitions are made so that signal activity is displayed

on the oscilloscope. This trigger mode can be used when the signal levels are

unknown, when the DC signals should be displayed, or when trigger conditions

occur often enough that forced triggers are unnecessary.

• Normal: In this trigger mode, triggers and acquisitions only occur when the

specified trigger conditions are found. This trigger mode can be used when the

signal is at a low repetition rate, when you only want to acquire specific events

specified by the trigger settings, or when you try to stabilize the display by

preventing the oscilloscope from auto-triggering.

• Single: In this trigger mode, a single trigger and acquisition only occur when the

specified trigger conditions are found, and then the oscilloscope stops. This

Triggering the Oscilloscope

trigger mode can be used when you need to make a single acquisition of the

specified event and analyze the acquisition result. You can pan and zoom the

currently displayed waveform without subsequent waveform data overwriting

the current waveform. After a single trigger is initiated, the oscilloscope is in

"STOP" state.

In Normal and Single trigger modes, you can click or tap the Force button in the

trigger menu or press the front-panel

key to force a trigger event.

8.4 Trigger Coupling

Trigger coupling determines what part of the signal is passed to the trigger circuit.

Please distinguish it from channel coupling (

To Specify Channel Coupling

). This

function is available only when the trigger type is Edge and the trigger source is an

analog channel.

In the "Trigger" menu, click or tap the

Coupling drop-down button to select the

desired coupling mode (by default, it is DC).

• DC: allows DC and AC components to pass the trigger circuitry.

• AC: blocks the DC components and attenuates the signals.

• LFR: blocks the DC components and rejects the low-frequency components.

• HFR: rejects the high frequency components.

TIP

When "AC" or "LFR" is selected as the coupling mode, no trigger level lines and trigger icons

are displayed. When you adjust the trigger level, you can only see the changes of the trigger

level values in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.5 Trigger Holdoff

Trigger holdoff can be help stabilize triggering on complex repetitive waveforms that

have multiple edges or other events between waveform repetitions (such as pulse

series). Holdoff time is specified as the amount of time that the oscilloscope waits for

re-arming the trigger circuitry after generating a correct trigger. The oscilloscope will

not trigger even if the trigger condition is met during the holdoff time and will only

re-arm the trigger circuitry after the holdoff time expires.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

For example, to get a stable trigger on the repetitive pulse burst as shown in the

figure below, set the holdoff time to be greater than t1 but less than t2.

Figure 8.2 Trigger Holdoff

Click or tap the trigger information label (as shown in the figure below) at the top of

the screen or press the front-panel

key to open the "Trigger" menu. Click or

tap the input field of

Holdoff to set the holdoff time (the holdoff to this time when

the waveforms are stably triggered) with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also

use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The adjustable range of

the holdoff time is from 8 ns (default) to 10 s.

8.6 Noise Rejection

Noise rejection can reject the high frequency noise in the signal and reduce the

possibility of triggering the oscilloscope by mistake.

Click or tap the trigger information label (as shown in the figure below) or press the

front-panel

key to open the "Trigger" menu. Click or tap the Noise Reject

on/off switch to enable or disable the noise rejection function.

8.7 Trigger Type

This series oscilloscope provides the following trigger types.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

8.7.1 Edge Trigger

Edge trigger identifies a trigger on the trigger level of the specified edge on the input

signal.

Trigger Type

Click or tap the

Type drop-down button to select "Edge".

Figure 8.3 Edge Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details,

refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Edge Type

In the

Slope item, select which edge of the input signal will trigger the oscilloscope.

The selected slope will be indicated in the trigger information label.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

• Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level

meets the specified trigger level.

• Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level

meets the specified trigger level.

• Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the voltage

level meets the preset trigger level.

TIP

When edge trigger is selected, you can also press the front-panel

key to switch the

edge type.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Trigger Coupling

Trigger Holdoff

, and

Noise Rejection

to set the

coupling, trigger holdoff, and noise rejection under this trigger type.

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.2 Pulse Width Trigger

Pulse width triggering sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the positive or negative

pulse of a specified width. In this mode, the oscilloscope will trigger when the pulse

width of the input signal satisfies the specified pulse width condition.

In this oscilloscope, positive pulse width is defined as the time difference between the

two crossing points of the trigger level and positive pulse; negative pulse width is

defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of the trigger level

and negative pulse, as shown in the figure below.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

Trigger Level

+Width

-Width

Trigger Level

Figure 8.4 Positive/Negative Pulse Width

Trigger Type

Click or tap the

Type drop-down button to select "Pulse".

Figure 8.5 Pulse Width Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details,

refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Polarity

In the

Polarity item, select the desired polarity: positive polarity ( ) or negative

polarity (

Trigger Condition

Set the trigger condition in the

When item.

• When you select "Positive" for polarity, ">" for trigger condition, the oscilloscope

triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater than the

specified pulse width.

• When you select "Positive" for polarity, "<" for trigger condition, the oscilloscope

triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is smaller than the

specified pulse width.

• When you select "Positive" for polarity, "< >" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater

than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified

upper limit of pulse width.

• When you select "Negative" for polarity, ">" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater

than the specified pulse width.

• When you select "Negative" for polarity, "<" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is smaller

than the specified pulse width.

• When you select "Negative" for polarity, "< >" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater

than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified

upper limit of pulse width.

Pulse Width Setting

• In the When menu, when ">" or "<" is selected, click or tap the input field of

Upper or lower to set the upper limit value or the lower limit value with the

pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob

to set the value. The pulse width available is from 1 ns to 10 s.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

• In the When menu, when "< >" is selected, click or tap the input field of Upper

and

Lower respectively to set the upper limit value and the lower limit value with

the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose

knob to set the values. The lower limit of the pulse width must be smaller than

the upper limit.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

to set the trigger holdoff and

noise rejection under this trigger type.

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.3 Slope Trigger

Slope triggering sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the positive or negative slope of

the specified time. This trigger mode is applicable to ramp and triangle waveforms.

In this oscilloscope, positive slope time is defined as the time difference between the

two crossing points of trigger level line A and B with the rising edge; negative slope

time is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of trigger level

line A and B with the falling edge. See the figure below.

Upper Limit of Trigger Level

(Up Level)

Lower Limit of Trigger Level

(Low Level)

Positive Slope Time

Negative Slope Time

Figure 8.6 Positive Slope Time/Negative Slope Time

Trigger Type

Click or tap the

Type drop-down button to select "Slope".

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Figure 8.7 Slope Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including

trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Edge Type

Select the input signal edge (in the

Slope item) on which the oscilloscope triggers.

• Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal.

• Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal.

Trigger Condition

Set the trigger condition in the

When item.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

• When you select "Rising" for the edge type, ">" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater

than the specified time.

• When you select "Rising" for the edge type, "<" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is smaller

than the specified time.

• When you select "Rising" for the edge type, "< >" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater

than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit

time.

• When you select "Falling" for the edge type, ">" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater

than the specified time.

• When you select "Falling" for the edge type, "<" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is smaller

than the specified time.

• When you select "Falling" for the edge type, "< >" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater

than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit

time.

Slope Time Setting

• In the

When item, when ">" or "<" is set to trigger conditions, click or tap the

input field of

Lower or Upper to set the lower limit value or the upper limit value

with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding knob to

set the value. The slope time available is from 1 ns to 10 s.

• In the When item, when "< >" is set to trigger conditions, click or tap the input

field of

Upper and Lower respectively to set the upper limit value and the lower

limit value with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding

knob to set the values. The lower slope time limit must be smaller than the

upper slope time limit.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

to set the trigger holdoff and

noise rejection under this trigger type.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the Level A/Level B input field to set the level A/level B with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the trigger level knob or use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to adjust level A/level B. When

Linkage is ticked, the upper limit

and lower limit values change at the same time. The difference between upper and

lower limit remains unchanged. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The

current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the

screen.

TIP

Press the trigger level knob to switch between three modes: "only adjust Level A", "only adjust

Level B", and "adjust Level A and Level B at the same time".

8.7.4 Video Trigger

The video signal can include image information and timing information, which adopts

different standards and formats. This series can trigger on the standard video signal

field or line of NTSC (National Television Standards Committee), PAL (Phase

Alternating Line), or SECAM (Sequential Couleur A Memoire).

Trigger Type

Click or tap the

Type drop-down button to select "Video".

Figure 8.8 Video Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including

trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger information

Triggering the Oscilloscope

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Video Polarity

In the

Polarity item, select the desired polarity: positive polarity ( ) or negative

polarity (

Video Standard

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Standard to select the desired video standard.

Table 8.1 Video Standard

Video Standard

Frame Frequency

(Frame)

Scan Type TV Scan Line

NTSC 30 Interlaced Scan 525

PAL/SECAM 25 Interlaced Scan 625

480p/60Hz 60 Progressive Scan 525

576p/50Hz 50 Progressive Scan 625

720p/60Hz 60 Progressive Scan 750

720p/50Hz 50 Progressive Scan 750

720p/30Hz 30 Progressive Scan 750

720p/25Hz 25 Progressive Scan 750

720p/24Hz 24 Progressive Scan 750

1080p/60Hz 60 Progressive Scan 1125

1080p/50Hz 50 Progressive Scan 1125

1080p/30Hz 30 Progressive Scan 1125

1080p/25Hz 25 Progressive Scan 1125

1080p/24Hz 24 Progressive Scan 1125

1080i/60Hz 60 Interlaced Scan 1125

1080i/50Hz 50 Interlaced Scan 1125

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Sync

In the

Sync item, select the desired sync type.

• All Lines: triggers on the first line found.

• Line: triggers on the specified line.

When this sync type is selected, you can specify a line number. Click or tap the

input field of Line to set the line number by using the pop-up numeric keypad.

You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The

range of the line number is related to the currently selected video standards. The

range is from 1 to 525 (NTSC), 1 to 625 (PAL/SECAM), 1 to 525 (480p), 1 to 625

(576p), 1 to 750 (720p), or 1 to 1125 (1080p/1080i).

• Odd: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the odd field. It is only

available when the video standard is set to "NTSC" or "PAL/SECAM".

• Even: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the even field. It is

only available when the video standard is set to "NTSC" or "PAL/SECAM".

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Noise Rejection

to set the noise rejection under this trigger type.

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

TIP

• To better observe the waveform details in the video signal, you can set a larger memory

depth first.

• In the trigger debugging process of video signals, the frequency in different part of the

signal can be reflected by a different brightness, as RIGOL's digital oscilloscope provides

the intensity graded color display function. Experienced users can quickly judge the

signal quality and discover abnormalities during the debugging process.

8.7.5 Pattern Trigger

The pattern trigger identifies a trigger condition by looking for a specified pattern.

This pattern is a logical "AND" combination of channels. Each channel can be set to H

(high), L (low), or X (don't care). A rising or falling edge (you can only specify a single

Triggering the Oscilloscope

edge) can be specified for one channel included in the pattern. When an edge is

specified, the oscilloscope will trigger at the edge specified if the pattern set for the

other channels are true (namely the actual pattern of the channel is the same as the

preset pattern). If no edge is specified, the oscilloscope will trigger on the last edge

that makes the pattern true. If all the channels in the pattern are set to "X", the

oscilloscope will not trigger.

Figure 8.9 Pattern Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the

Type drop-down button to select "Pattern".

Figure 8.10 Pattern Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details,

refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Pattern Setting

The following five patterns are available:

• 1: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "1", i.e. the voltage level is higher

than the trigger level of the channel.

• 0: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "0", i.e. the voltage level is lower

than the trigger level of the channel.

• X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.e. this channel is not used as a

part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "X", the

oscilloscope will not trigger.

•

: sets the pattern to the rising edge of the channel selected.

•

: sets the pattern to the falling edge of the channel selected.

The Left/Right arrow key indicates moving left/right to switch the channel pattern.

"All" indicates all bits. Select a pattern for a channel and then click or tap

All. The

patterns of all the other channels will be set to the currently selected pattern. The

corresponding patterns are displayed at the top of the screen, representing the

patterns of channels CH1-CH4 and D0-D15 from left to right, as shown in the figure

below. The patterns of D0-D15 are displayed only when the digital channel probe is

connected.

Only one edge (rising or falling edge) can be specified in the pattern. If one edge item

is currently defined and then another edge item is defined in another channel in the

pattern, then a prompt message "Invalid input" is displayed.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

to set the trigger holdoff and

noise rejection under this trigger type.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.6 Duration Trigger

In duration trigger, the oscilloscope identifies a trigger condition by searching for the

duration of a specified pattern. This pattern is a logical "AND" combination of the

channels. Each channel can be set to 1 (high), 0 (low), or X (don't care). The

instrument triggers when the duration (∆T) of this pattern meets the preset time, as

shown in the figure below.

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

∆T ∆T

Pattern:HLHL

Figure 8.11 Duration Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Type to select "Duration".

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Figure 8.12 Duration Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details,

refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Pattern Setting

The following three patterns are available:

• 1: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "1", i.e. the voltage level is higher

than the trigger level of the channel.

• 0: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "0", i.e. the voltage level is lower

than the trigger level of the channel.

• X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.e. this channel is not used as a

part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "X", the

oscilloscope will not trigger.

The Left/Right arrow key indicates moving left/right to switch the channel pattern.

"All" indicates all bits. Select a pattern for a channel and then click or tap

All. The

Triggering the Oscilloscope

patterns of all the other channels will be set to the currently selected pattern. The

corresponding patterns are displayed at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure

below. D0-D15 are displayed only when the digital channel probe is connected.

Trigger Condition

Set the trigger condition in the

When item.

• >: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater the preset time. Click or

tap the input field of

Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the pattern

with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. The available range is from 1 ns to 10 s.

• <: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the preset time. Click

or tap the input field of

Upper to set the upper limit of the duration of the

pattern. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

The available range is from 1 ns to 10 s.

• < >: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the upper limit of

the preset time and greater than the lower limit of the preset time. Click or tap

the input field of

Upper to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern, and

the range is from 1.01 ns to 10 s. Click or tap the input field of

Lower to set the

lower limit of the duration of the pattern, and the range is from 1 ns to 9.9 s. You

can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the upper/lower limit.

The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.

• > <: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater than the upper limit of

the preset time or smaller than the lower limit of the preset time. Click or tap the

input field of

Upper to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern, and the

range is from 1.01 ns to 10 s. Click or tap the input field of

Lower to set the

lower limit of the duration of the pattern, and the range is from 1 ns to 9.9 s. You

can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the upper/lower limit.

The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

to set the trigger holdoff and

noise rejection under this trigger type.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.7 Timeout Trigger

In Timeout trigger, the oscilloscope triggers when the time interval (∆T) (the time

from when the rising edge (or falling edge) of the input signal passes through the

trigger level to the time from when the neighboring falling edge (or rising edge)

passes through the trigger level) is greater than the preset timeout value, as shown in

Figure 8.13

Time Out

Figure 8.13 Timeout Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the

Type drop-down button to select "Timeout".

Triggering the Oscilloscope

Figure 8.14 Timeout Trigger Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details,

refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Edge Type

Slope item, select the edge type from which the input signal passes through the

trigger level.

• Rising: starts timing when the rising edge of the input signal passes through the

trigger level.

• Falling: starts timing when the falling edge of the input signal passes through

the trigger level.

• Either: starts timing when either edge of the input signal passes through the

trigger level.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Timeout Value

Timeout value represents the maximum time that the signal remains idle before the

signal passes through the trigger level. Click or tap the input field of

Timeout, and

then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the timeout value of Timeout trigger. You

can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Noise Rejection

to set the noise rejection under this trigger type.

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.8 Runt Trigger

The runt trigger sets the oscilloscope to trigger pulses that cross one trigger level but

not another, as shown in the figure below.

Lower Limit of the

Trigger Level

Upper Limit of the

Trigger Level

Negative Runt Pulse

Positive Runt Pulse

Figure 8.15 Runt Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Type to select "Runt".

Triggering the Oscilloscope

Figure 8.16 Runt Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Polarity

Select the pulse polarity of Runt trigger under the

Polarity item.

• Positive

: indicates that the instrument triggers on the positive runt pulse.

• Negative

: triggers on the negative runt pulse.

Trigger Condition

Set the Runt trigger condition in the

When item.

• None: indicates not setting the trigger condition of Runt trigger.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

• >: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater the Lower limit of pulse width.

Click or tap the input field of

Lower to set the minimum pulse width of Runt

trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to modify the value.

• <: triggers when the runt pulse width is smaller than the upper limit of pulse

width. Click or tap the input field of Upper to set the maximum pulse width of

Runt trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to modify the value.

• < >: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit and

smaller than the upper limit of pulse width. Click or tap the input field of

Upper

to set the maximum pulse width of Runt trigger with the pop-up numeric

keypad. Click or tap the input field of

Lower to set the minimum pulse width of

Runt trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to modify the maximum and minimum pulse

width. The lower limit of the pulse width must be smaller than the upper limit.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

to set the trigger holdoff and

noise rejection under this trigger type.

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the

Level A/Level B input field to set the level A/level B with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the trigger level knob or use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to adjust level A/level B. When

Linkage is ticked, the upper limit

and lower limit values change at the same time. The difference between upper and

lower limit remains unchanged. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The

current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the

screen.

TIP

Press the trigger level knob to switch between three modes: "only adjust Level A", "only adjust

Level B", and "adjust Level A and Level B at the same time".

Triggering the Oscilloscope

8.7.9 Window Trigger

Window trigger provides a high trigger level and a low trigger level. The instrument

triggers when the input signal passes through the high trigger level or the low trigger

level.

Trigger Type

Click or tap the

Type drop-down button to select "Over".

Figure 8.17 Window Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including

trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Edge Type

Select the input signal edge (in the

Slope item) on which the oscilloscope triggers.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

• Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when Position condition is

met.

• Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when

Position condition

is met.

• Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when

Position

condition is met.

Trigger Position

After selecting the window type, specify the time point of trigger by selecting the

trigger position (in

Position item).

• Enter: triggers when the input signal enters the specified trigger level range.

• Exit: triggers when the input signal exits the specified trigger level range.

• Time: triggers when the accumulated hold time since the input signal entered

the specified trigger level range is equal to the window time. After you select

this type, click or tap the input field of Time to set it by using the pop-up

numeric keypad. The available range is from 1 ns to 10 s.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

to set the trigger holdoff and

noise rejection under this trigger type.

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the

Level A/Level B input field to set the level A/level B with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the trigger level knob or use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to adjust level A/level B. When

Linkage is ticked, the upper limit

and lower limit values change at the same time. The difference between upper and

lower limit remains unchanged. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The

current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the

screen.

TIP

Press the trigger level knob to switch between three modes: "only adjust Level A", "only adjust

Level B", and "adjust Level A and Level B at the same time".

Triggering the Oscilloscope

8.7.10 Delay Trigger

In Delay trigger, you need to set Source A and Source B. The oscilloscope triggers

when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges (Edge A and Edge B) of

Source A and Source B meets the preset time limit, as shown in the figure below.

Edge A and Edge B must be two neighboring edges.

Source A

Source B

Edge A

Edge B

Figure 8.18 Delay Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the

Type drop-down button to select "Delay".

Figure 8.19 Delay Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including

trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Source Setting

• Source A

Click or tap the drop-down button of

SourceA to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For

details, refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the

trigger information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source,

can you obtain a stable trigger.

• Edge A

Select the trigger edge type ("Rising" or "Falling") of Source A in Delay trigger in

the EdgeA item.

• Source B

Click or tap the drop-down button of

SourceB to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For

details, refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the

trigger information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source,

can you obtain a stable trigger.

• Edge B

Select the trigger edge type ("Rising" or "Falling") of Source B in Delay trigger in

the

EdgeB item.

Set the Trigger Condition

Set the time limit condition of Delay trigger in the

when item.

• >: triggers when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges of Source

A and Source B is greater than the preset time lower limit. Click or tap the input

field of Lower to set the delay time lower limit in Delay trigger with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value.

• <: triggers when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges of Source

A and Source B is smaller than the preset time upper limit. Click or tap the input

field of

Upper to set the delay time upper limit in Delay trigger with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value.

• < >: triggers when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges of

Source A and Source B is greater than the lower limit of the preset time and

Triggering the Oscilloscope

smaller than the upper limit of the preset time. Click or tap the input field of

Upper to set the delay time upper limit in Delay trigger with the pop-up numeric

keypad. Click or tap the input field of

Lower to set the delay time lower limit in

Delay trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the upper and lower limit. The lower

time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.

• > <: triggers when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges of

Source A and Source B is smaller than the lower limit of the preset time or

greater than the upper limit of the preset time. Click or tap the input field of

Upper to set the delay time upper limit in Delay trigger with the pop-up numeric

keypad. Click or tap the input field of

Lower to set the delay time lower limit in

Delay trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the upper and lower limit. The lower

time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

to set the trigger holdoff and

noise rejection under this trigger type.

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the

Level A/Level B input field to set the level A/level B with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to adjust

level A/level B or use the trigger level knob to adjust the level (the focus of the trigger

level knob is the last modified level). For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the

screen.

8.7.11 Setup/Hold Trigger

In setup&hold trigger, you need to set the clock source and data source. The setup

time starts when the data signal passes the trigger level and ends at the coming of

the specified clock edge; the hold time starts at the coming of the specified clock

edge and ends when the data signal crosses the trigger level again, as shown in the

figure below. The oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time is smaller

than the preset time.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Data Source

Clock Source

T2 is the hold time

T1 is the setup time

Edge

The data type is H

Figure 8.20 Setup/Hold Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Type to select "Setup/Hold".

Figure 8.21 Setup/Hold Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

Clock Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of

SCL to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details,

refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Edge Type

Select the desired clock edge type in the

Slope item, and it can be set to "Rising" or

"Falling".

Data Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of

SDA to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details,

refer to

Trigger Source

The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Data Type

Select the effective pattern of the data signal in the

Data Type item. It can be set to H

(high level) or L (low level).

Trigger Condition

Set the Setup/Hold trigger condition in the

When item.

• Setup: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time is smaller than the

specified setup time. After selecting this type, click or tap the input field of

Setup to set the setup time with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use

the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

• Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the hold time is smaller than the specified

hold time. After selecting this type, click or tap the input field of Hold to set the

hold time with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value.

• Setup/Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time smaller

than the specified time value. After selecting this type, click or tap the input field

Setup and Hold respectively to set the setup and hold time with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the values.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

to set the trigger holdoff and

noise rejection under this trigger type.

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the

Level A/Level B input field to set the level A/level B with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to adjust

level A/level B or use the trigger level knob to adjust the level (the focus of the trigger

level knob is the last modified level). For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the

screen.

8.7.12 Nth Edge Trigger

The Nth edge trigger lets you to trigger on the Nth edge that occurs after a specified

idle time. For example, in the waveform as shown in the figure below, the instrument

should trigger on the second rising edge after the specified idle time (the time

between two neighboring rising edges), and the idle time should be within the range

between P and M (P < Idle Time < M). Wherein, M is the time between the first rising

edge and its previous rising edge; P is the maximum time between the rising edges

that participate in counting.

Edge Type=

Edge Num=2

P<Idle Time<M

Figure 8.22 Nth Edge Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the

Type drop-down button to select "Nth Edge".

Triggering the Oscilloscope

Figure 8.23 Nth Edge Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including

trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details,

refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Edge Type

Select the input signal edge (in the

Slope item) on which the oscilloscope triggers.

• Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level

meets the specified trigger level.

• Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level

meets the specified trigger level.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Idle Time

Click or tap the input field of

Idle Time, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the idle time before the edge counting in Nth edge trigger. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

Edge Count

Click or tap the input field of

Edges, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

value of "N" in Nth edge trigger. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose

knob to set the value. The available range is from 1 to 65,535.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Noise Rejection

to set the noise rejection under this trigger type.

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.13 RS232 Trigger

RS232 bus is a serial communication mode used in data transmission between PCs or

between a PC and a terminal. In RS232 serial protocol, a character is transmitted as a

frame of data. The frame consists of 1 start bit, 5-8 data bits, 1 check bit, and 1-2 stop

bits. Its format is as shown in the figure below. This series oscilloscope triggers when

detecting the start frame, error frame, check error, or the specified data of the RS232

signal.

Stop BitCheck BitData BitStart Bit

1 bit 5~8 bits 1 bit 1~2 bits

Figure 8.24 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Protocol

Triggering the Oscilloscope

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Type to select "RS232".

Figure 8.25 RS232 Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For details,

refer to

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Polarity

Select the polarity of data transmission in the

Polarity item. It can be set to "Positive"

or "Negative" .

Trigger Condition

Set the desired trigger condition in the

When item.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

• Start: triggers on the start frame position.

• Error: triggers when an error frame is detected.

• Check Error: triggers when a check error is detected.

• Data: triggers on the last bit of the preset data bits. Click or tap the input field of

Data, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the data of RS232 trigger.

You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

Baud Rate

You can select the baud rate of data transmission (i.e. specifies a clock frequency).

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Baud Rate, then select the preset baud rate.

The available baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps, 150 bps, 300 bps,

and etc. You can also self-define the baud rate.

Data Bits

Indicates the number of bits per frame. Click or tap the drop-down button of

Data

Bits to select the desired data bits. The available data bits include "5 Bits", "6 Bits", "7

Bits", and "8 Bits".

Stop Bit

Indicates when to stop outputting data. Select the desired stop bit in the

Stop Bit

item. The available data bits include 1 Bit, 1.5 Bits, and 2 Bits.

Parity

Used to check whether the data are properly transmitted. Select None, Even, or Odd

in the

Parity item.

• None: indicates that no check bit appears during the transmission.

• Even: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit is an

even number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "0" should be added

to the check bit.

• Odd: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit is an

odd number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "1" should be added to

the check bit.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Noise Rejection

to set the noise rejection under this trigger type.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.14 I2C Trigger

I2C is a 2-wire serial bus used to connect the microcontroller and its peripheral

device. It is a bus standard widely used in the microelectronic communication control

field.

The I2C serial bus consists of SCL and SDA. Its transmission rate is determined by SCL,

and its transmission data is determined by SDA, as shown in the figure below. The

instrument triggers on the start condition, restart, stop, missing acknowledgment,

specific device address, or data value. Besides, it can also trigger on the specific

device address and data values at the same time.

Figure 8.26 Sequence Diagram of I2C Protocol

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Type to select "I2C".

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

Figure 8.27 I2C Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down buttons of

SCL and SDA to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15 to

specify the sources of SCL and SDA respectively. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Trigger Condition

Set the desired trigger condition in the

When item.

• Start: triggers when SDA data transitions from high level to low level while SCL

is high level.

• Stop: triggers when SDA data transitions from low level to high level while SCL is

high level.

• Restart: triggers when another start condition occurs before a stop condition.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

• MissedAck: triggers when ACK is 1.

• Address: the trigger searches for the specified address value. When this event

occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the read/write bit. After this trigger

condition is selected:

- Click or tap the drop-down button of

Direction to select "Write", "Read", or

"R/W".

This setting is not available when

AddrBits is set to "8 Bits".

- Click or tap the drop-down button of

AddrBits to select the desired

address bits. The available address bits are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".

- Click or tap the input field of

Address, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the address of I2C trigger. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value.

• Data: the trigger searches for the specified data value on the data line (SDA).

When this event occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the clock line (SCL)

transition edge of the last bit of data. After this trigger condition is selected, you

can set the following parameters.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of

AddrBits to select the desired

address bits. The available address bits are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".

- Click or tap the input field of

Bytes, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the length of the data. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is from 1 to 5.

- Click or tap the input field of

Data, and then the "Format" interface is will

displayed. You can select "Bin" or "Hex" data format.

Figure 8.28 Binary Format Setting

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

100

Figure 8.29 Hexadecimal Format Setting

• A&D: the oscilloscope searches for the specified address and data at the same

time, then triggers when both the address and data meet the conditions. After

this condition is selected, you need to set the sub Data-menu items such as

Direction, Bytes, AddrBits, Address, and Data. For the setting methods, refer to

descriptions in "Address" and "Data" conditions.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Noise Rejection

to set the noise rejection under this trigger type.

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

• Level A

Click or tap the input field of

Level A to input the level of SCL with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value. When the level A information is displayed in the trigger label, you can

also use the trigger level knob to adjust the level of SCL. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Level

• Level B

Click or tap the input field of

Level B to input the level of SDA with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

Triggering the Oscilloscope

101

the value. When the level B information is displayed in the trigger label, you can

also use the trigger level knob to adjust the level of SDA. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Level

8.7.15 SPI Trigger

In SPI trigger, after the CS or timeout condition is satisfied, the oscilloscope triggers

when the specified data is found. When using SPI trigger, you need to specify the CLK

clock sources and MISO data sources.

The figure below shows the sequential chart of SPI bus.

SDA

SCL

D6 D5

D4 D3

D2 D1 D0

Figure 8.30 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Type to select "SPI".

Figure 8.31 SPI Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including

trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger information

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

102

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down buttons of

CLK and MISO to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15

to specify the sources of CLK and MISO respectively. For details, refer to descriptions

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Edge Type

Select the desired clock edge type in

Slope.

• Rising: samples the MISO data on the rising edge of the clock.

• Falling: samples the MISO data on the falling edge of the clock.

Trigger Condition

Select the desired trigger condition in

When.

• With CS: if the CS signal is valid, the oscilloscope will trigger when the data

(SDA) satisfying the trigger conditions is found.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of CS to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15 as

the CS signal line.

- After selecting this condition, you can click or tap "Positive" (high level is

valid) or "Negative" (low level is valid) in

CS Mode.

• Timeout: the oscilloscope starts to search for the data (MISO) on which to

trigger after the clock signal (CLK) stays in the idle state for a specified period of

time. After selecting this condition, you can click or tap the Timeout input field,

then use the numeric keypad to set the idle time. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The range is from 8 ns to 10

Data

Click or tap the of field of

Data, and then the "Format" interface is displayed. You can

set the data bit that needs to be triggered. For details, refer to descriptions in

I2C

Trigger

Triggering the Oscilloscope

103

Data Bits

Click or tap the input field of

DataBits, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the number of bits in the serial data string. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. The number of bits in the string can be set to any

integer ranging from 4 to 32.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Noise Rejection

to set the noise rejection under this trigger type.

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

• Level A

Click or tap the input field of

Level A to input the level of CLK with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob or the

trigger level knob to adjust the level of CLK. When the level A information is

displayed in the trigger label, you can also use the trigger level knob to adjust

the level of CLK. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current

trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

• Level B

Click or tap the input field of Level B to input the level of MISO with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to

adjust the level of MISO. When the level B information is displayed in the trigger

label, you can also use the trigger level knob to adjust the level of MISO. For

details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is displayed

in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

• Level C

Click or tap the input field of Level C to input the level of CS with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to

adjust the level of CS. When the level C information is displayed in the trigger

label, you can also use the trigger level knob to adjust the level of CS. For details,

refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the

trigger information label at the top of the screen.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

104

8.7.16 CAN Trigger

This series oscilloscope can trigger on the start of a frame, end of a frame, frame of

the specified type (e.g. Remote, Overload, Data), or error frame of the specified type

(e.g. Answer Error, Check Error, Format Error) of the CAN signal.

The data frame format of the CAN bus is as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8.32 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Type to select "CAN".

Figure 8.33 CAN Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including

trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

105

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Source to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For

details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated

in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Signal Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Signal Type to select the desired signal type.

• CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.

• CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.

• TX/RX: indicates the Transmit signal and Receive signal from the CAN bus

transceiver.

• DIFF: indicates the CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog channel

by using a differential probe. Connect the probe's positive lead to the CAN_H

bus signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L bus signal.

Baud Rate

Click or tap the drop-down button of Baud to select the preset baud rate. The

available baud rates include 10 kbps, 20 kbps, 33.3 kbps, 50 kbps, 62.5 kbps, 83.3

kbps, and etc. You can also self-define the baud rate.

Sample Position

Sample position is a point within a bit's time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at

this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from the

start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure below.

One Bit

60%

70%

80%

Figure 8.34 Sample Position

Click or tap the input field of Sample Position to set it by using the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The

settable range is from 10% to 90%.

Trigger Condition

Click or tap the drop-down button of

When to select the desired trigger condition.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

106

• SOF: triggers at the start of a frame.

• EOF: triggers at the end of a frame.

• Remote ID: triggers on the specified ID of Remote frame. When you select

Remote ID, you need to set the following parameters.

- Click or tap the

Extended ID on/off switch to enable or disable the

extended ID.

- Click or tap the input field of

ID, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the ID that needs to be operated on. For details, refer

to descriptions in

I2C Trigger

• Overload: triggers on the overload frames.

• Frame ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID. After you select

Frame ID, you can refer to the "Remote ID" mentioned above to set the

Extended ID and ID.

• Frame Data: triggers on the data frames with the specified Data. When you

select

Frame Data, you need to set the following parameters.

- Click or tap the input field of

Data, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For

details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger

- Click or tap the input field of

Bytes, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the length of the data. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is from 1 to 8.

• Data&ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID and data. When you

select

Data&ID, you need to set the ID, Extended ID, Data, and Bytes.

• Frame Error: triggers on the error frame.

• Bit Fill: triggers on the error frame with the bit fill.

• Answer Error: triggers on the answer error frame.

• Check Error: triggers on the check error frame.

• Format Error: triggers on the format error frame.

• Random Error: triggers on the random error frame, such as the format error

frame, answer error frame, etc.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Noise Rejection

to set the noise rejection under this trigger type.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

107

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.17 LIN Trigger

This series can trigger on the sync field of LIN signal, and can also trigger on the

specified identifier, data, or frame.

The data frame format of the LIN bus is as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8.35 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Type to select "LIN".

Figure 8.36 LIN Trigger Setting Menu

After a trigger type is selected, the current trigger setting information (including the

trigger type, source, and level) is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

108

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Source to select CH1-CH4 or D0-D15. For

details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The selected trigger source is indicated

in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

Only when you select the channel that has signal inputs as the trigger source, can you

obtain a stable trigger.

Protocol Version

Version, select the protocol version that matches the signal under test. The

available versions include 1.X, 2.X, and Both.

Baud Rate

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Baud to select the preset baud rate. The

available baud rates include 1.2 kbps, 2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, and etc.

You can also self-define the baud rate.

Sample Position

Sample position is a point within a bit's time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at

this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from the

start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure below.

One Bit

60%

70%

80%

Figure 8.37 Sample Position

Click or tap the

Sample Position input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the value. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

The settable range is from 10% to 90%.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

109

Trigger Condition

Click or tap the drop-down button of

When to select the desired trigger condition.

• Sync: triggers on the last bit of the sync field.

• ID: triggers when the frames with the specified ID are found.

Click or tap the input field of

ID, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

ID. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

• Data: triggers when the data that meet the preset conditions are found.

- Click or tap the input field of

Data, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For

details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger

- Click or tap the input field of

Bytes, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the length of the data. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is from 1 to 8.

• Data&ID: triggers when the frames with the specified ID and data that meet the

preset conditions are both found.

When Data&ID is selected, you need to set the

Data, Bytes, and ID.

• Sleep: triggers when the sleep frame is found.

• Wakeup: triggers when the wakeup frame is found.

• Error: triggers on the specified type of error frame. Click or tap the drop-down

button of

Error Type to select the error type: Sync, Even Odd, or Check Sum.

Trigger Mode

Sweep, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

You can refer to

Noise Rejection

to set the noise rejection under this trigger type.

Trigger Level

Click or tap the

Level input field to set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the front-panel trigger level knob or the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

DHO900 User Guide

110

8.8 Trigger Output Connector

The rear-panel trigger output connector ([AUX OUT]) of this series can output trigger

signals determined by the current setting (hardware trigger).

Click or tap

> Utility. Click or tap Setup, and then select "TrigOut" in Aux Out. A

signal which reflects the current oscilloscope capture rate can be output from [AUX

OUT] connector each time a trigger is generated by the oscilloscope. If this signal is

connected to a waveform display device to measure the frequency, the measurement

result is the same as the current capture rate.

If "PassFail" is selected in Aux Out, the instrument can output a pulse from the [AUX

OUT] connector when a pass/failed event is detected during the pass/fail test.

Triggering the Oscilloscope

111

Math Operation

This series oscilloscopes can realize multiple math operations between waveforms of

different channels, including arithmetic operation, spectrum operation, logic

operation, function operation, and digital filter. You can access the

Math menu in the

following ways.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select

Math to enter the "Math" menu.

• Click or tap the

Math button on the toolbar at the upper-right corner of the

screen to enter the "Math" menu.

• Click or tap

M1-M4 in the Math label at the bottom of the screen to open the

"Math" window. You can also click or tap the Math label and then select a label

from

M1-M4 to enter the corresponding Math window. Then click or tap the

M1-M4 label again, or the icon at the upper-right corner of the window to

enter the "Math" menu. The Math label is as shown in the figure below.

• Press the front-panel key to enter the "Math" menu.

Figure 9.1 Math Menu

This oscilloscope provides four math operations: Math1, Math2, Math3, and Math4. In

the

Math menu, you can select the desired math operation type by clicking or

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

112

tapping the Math1-Math4 label or by sliding the menu left and right. This manual

takes Math1 as an example to introduce math operation.

In the

Math menu, click or tap the Operation on/off switch to show or hide the

waveform display window of the operation results. By default, it is OFF. When "ON" is

selected for Math1-Math4, the menu as shown in the figure below is displayed on the

screen.

Figure 9.2 Waveform Display Window of the Operation Results

You can drag the title bar of the display window to change the position of the

window. You can also click or tap

at the upper-right corner of the window to close

it.

9.1 Arithmetic Operation

In the Math menu, click or tap the Operator drop-down button to select the desired

math operation. The arithmetic operations supported by this oscilloscope include A

+B, A-B, A×B, and A÷B.

• A+B adds the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point

and displays the results.

• A-B subtracts the waveform voltage values of signal source B from that of source

A point by point and displays the results.

• A×B multiplies the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by

point and displays the results.

• A÷B divides the waveform voltage values of signal source A by that of source B

point by point and displays the results. It can be used to analyze the Multiple

relation of the two channels waveforms.

Math Operation

113

TIP

When the voltage of signal source B is 0 V, the division result is treated as 0.

Figure 9.3 Arithmetic Operation Menu

Operation Result Display Window

Click or tap the

Operation on/off switch to enable the display of the arithmetic

operation result window. The source and the vertical scale parameters are displayed

at the top of the window, as shown in the figure below.

Source Vertical Scale

Label

Sample Rate

Figure 9.4 Operation Result Display Window

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

114

Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of

SourceA or SourceB to select CH1-CH4 or

Ref1-Ref10. When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically

switches to the ON state.

TIP

Besides CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10, the Math2 source can be set to Math1; the Math3 source

can be set to Math1 or Math2; the Math4 source can be set to Math1, Math2, or Math3.

Selecting a Math automatically enables its window display and sets its Operation on/off switch

to ON.

Scale

Scale is used to set the vertical scale of the operation result. You can set the vertical

scale in the following ways.

• In Math menu, rotate the corresponding multipurpose knob on the front panel

or click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Scale to increase or

decrease the scale value. You can also click or tap the input field to input a

specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

• Close the menu and then adjust the vertical scale with the pinch&stretch gesture

on the touch screen. You can also rotate the multipurpose knob 1 on the front

panel to adjust the vertical scale. Please refer to

Front Panel Overview

configure the front-panel multipurpose knobs.

Offset

Offset is used to set the vertical offset of the operation result. You can set the vertical

offset in the following ways.

• In Math menu, rotate the corresponding multipurpose knob on the front panel

or click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Offset to increase or

decrease the scale value. You can also click or tap the input field to input a

specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

• Close the menu and then adjust the vertical offset with the drag gesture on the

touch screen. You can also rotate the multipurpose knob 2 on the front panel to

adjust the vertical offset. Please refer to

Front Panel Overview

to configure the

front-panel multipurpose knobs.

Invert

Invert is used to enable or disable the inverted display of the waveform. When the

Invert function is disabled, the waveform is displayed normally; when enabled, the

voltage values of the displayed waveform are inverted.

Waveform

This oscilloscope provides Main and Zoom for the measurement range.

Math Operation

115

• Main indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base region.

• Zoom indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

To use "Zoom", first enable the

Zoom Mode (Delayed Sweep)

in the

Horizontal

System

menu.

Expand

The oscilloscope supports two vertical expansion modes: GND (default) and Center.

• GND: When the vertical scale is changed, the math operation waveform will

expand or compress about the ground level of the signal.

• Center: When the vertical scale is changed, the math operation waveform will

expand or compress about the center of the display.

Auto Set

Click or tap

AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the operation

results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for you to better

observe.

Label

It is used to set the label for the math operation results. For setting methods, refer to

descriptions in

To Turn the Channel Label Display On/Off

Grid

For setting methods, refer to the descriptions in

To Set the Screen Grid

9.2 Function Operation

In the Math menu, click or tap the Operator drop-down button to select the desired

function operation. The available function operation types of this oscilloscope include

Intg, Diff, Sqrt, Lg (Base 10 Exponential), Ln, Exp, Abs, and AX+B.

• Intg: calculates the integral of the selected source. For example, you can use

integral to measure the area under a waveform or the pulse energy.

• Diff: calculates the discrete time derivative of the selected source. For example,

you can use differentiate to measure the instantaneous slope of a waveform.

• Sqrt: calculates the square roots of the selected source point by point and

displays the results.

• Lg (Base 10 Exponential): calculates the base 10 exponential of the selected

source point by point and displays the results.

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

116

• Ln: calculates the natural logarithm (Ln) of the selected source point by point

and displays the results.

• Exp: calculates the exponential of the selected source point by point and

displays the results.

• Abs: calculates the absolute value of the selected source and displays the results.

• AX+B: applies a linear function to the selected source, and displays the results.

Figure 9.5 Function Operation Menu

Operation Result Display Window

Click or tap the

Operation on/off switch to enable or disable the display of the

operation result window. The source and the vertical scale parameters are displayed

at the top of the window, as shown in the figure below.

Math Operation

117

Source Vertical Scale

Label

Sample Rate

Figure 9.6 Operation Result Display Window

Source

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select the source from CH1-CH4 or

Ref1-Ref10. When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically

switches to the ON state.

TIP

Besides CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10, the Math2 source can be set to Math1; the Math3 source

can be set to Math1 or Math2; the Math4 source can be set to Math1, Math2, or Math3.

Selecting a Math automatically enables its window display and sets its Operation on/off switch

to ON.

Auto Set

Click or tap

AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the operation

results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for you to better

observe.

Scale

Scale is used to set the vertical scale of the operation result. You can set the vertical

scale in the following ways.

• In

Math menu, rotate the corresponding multipurpose knob on the front panel

or click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Scale to increase or

decrease the scale value. You can also click or tap the input field to input a

specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

• Close the menu and then adjust the vertical scale with the pinch&stretch gesture

on the touch screen. You can also rotate the multipurpose knob 1 on the front

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

118

panel to adjust the vertical scale. Please refer to

Front Panel Overview

configure the front-panel multipurpose knobs.

Offset

Offset is used to set the vertical offset of the operation result. You can set the vertical

offset in the following ways.

• In

Math menu, rotate the corresponding multipurpose knob on the front panel

or click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Offset to increase or

decrease the scale value. You can also click or tap the input field to input a

specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

• Close the menu and then adjust the vertical offset with the drag gesture on the

touch screen. You can also rotate the multipurpose knob 2 on the front panel to

adjust the vertical offset. Please refer to

Front Panel Overview

to configure the

front-panel multipurpose knobs.

Invert

Invert is used to enable or disable the inverted display of the waveform. When the

Invert function is disabled, the waveform is displayed normally; when enabled, the

voltage values of the displayed waveform are inverted.

Waveform

This oscilloscope provides Main and Zoom for the measurement range.

• Main indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base region.

• Zoom indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

To use "Zoom", first enable the

Zoom Mode (Delayed Sweep)

in the

Horizontal

System

menu.

Label

It is used to set the label for the math operation results. For setting methods, refer to

descriptions in

To Turn the Channel Label Display On/Off

Expand

The oscilloscope supports two vertical expansion modes: GND (default) and Center.

• GND: When the vertical scale is changed, the math operation waveform will

expand or compress about the ground level of the signal.

• Center: When the vertical scale is changed, the math operation waveform will

expand or compress about the center of the display.

Math Operation

119

Grid

For setting methods, refer to the descriptions in

To Set the Screen Grid

Parameter Setting

• When the operator is "Intg", click or tap the

Offset input field and use the pop-

up numeric keypad to set the DC offset calibration factor of the input signal. You

can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

• When the operator is "Diff", click or tap Smooth input field and use the pop-up

numeric keypad to set the number of smooth times for the differential

operation. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the

value.

• When the operator is "AX+B", click or tap

A/B input field and use the pop-up

numeric keypad to set the A/B value. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value.

9.3 FFT Operation

FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is used to transform time-domain signals to frequency-

domain components (frequency spectrum). This oscilloscope provides FFT operation

function which enables you to observe the time-domain waveform and spectrum of

the signal at the same time. FFT operation can facilitate the following works:

• Measure harmonic components and distortion in the system;

• Display the characteristics of the noise in DC power;

• Analyze vibration.

In the

Math menu, click or tap the Operator drop-down button to select FFT to

access the menu as shown in

Figure 9.7

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

120

Figure 9.7 FFT Operation Menu

Operation On/Off

Click or tap the

Operation on/off switch to enable the FFT operation result window.

The parameters such as center frequency, frequency range, and resolution are

displayed at the top of the window, as shown in the figure below. FFT resolution is the

quotient of the sample rate and the number of FFT points. If the number of FFT points

is a fixed value, then the higher the sample rate, the higher the resolution.

NOTE

The number of FFT analysis points can be 1 Mpts in maximum.

Source

Center

Frequency

Label

Sample

rate

Frequency

Span

Resolution

Figure 9.8 FFT Operation Window

Math Operation

121

Source

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4 as the

source. When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically

switches to the ON state.

Auto Set

Click or tap

AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the operation

results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for you to better

observe.

Frequency Range

X, select "Span-Center" or "Start-End" mode and then configure the frequency

range setting.

• Span-Center (frequency span to center frequency): Span specifies the

frequency range represented by the width from the frequency at the left side of

the window to the frequency at the right side of the window. Divide the

frequency span by 10 to obtain the frequency per division.

Click or tap the

Center input field to set the frequency of the frequency-domain

waveform relative to the horizontal center of the screen. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is from 5 Hz to 625

MHz. Click or tap the

Span input field to set the frequency span with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value. Its range is from 10 Hz to 625 MHz.

• Start-End (start frequency to stop frequency): Start frequency specifies the

frequency at the left side of the window. Click or tap the

Start input field to set

the start frequency with the pop-up numeric keypad or use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is from 0 Hz to (stop frequency-10

Hz). Stop frequency specifies the frequency at the right side of the window. Click

or tap the

End input field to set the stop frequency with the pop-up numeric

keypad or use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is

from (start frequency + 10 Hz) to 625 MHz. By default, it is 10 MHz.

Vertical Scale/Offset

Unit item, you can select dBm/dBV or Vrms as the unit for Scale and Offset.

For how to set the

Scale, refer to the descriptions in

Scale

of "Arithmetic Operation".

For how to set the

Offset, refer to the descriptions in

Offset

of "Arithmetic Operation".

Window Function

Spectral leakage can be considerably minimized when a window function is used. The

oscilloscope provides 6 FFT window functions which have different characteristics and

are applicable to measure different waveforms, as shown in the table below. You need

to select the window function according to the characteristics of the waveform to be

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

122

measured. Click or tap the Window drop-down button to select the desired window

function.

Table 9.1 Window Function

Window

Function

Characteristics

Waveforms Applicable to the

Window Function

Rectangular

Best frequency resolution

Poorest amplitude resolution

Similar to the situation when no

window is applied

Transient or short pulse, the signal

levels before and after the

multiplication are basically the same

Sine waveforms with the same

amplitudes and rather similar

frequencies

Wide band random noise with

relatively slow change of waveform

spectrum

Blackman-

Harris

Best amplitude resolution

Poorest frequency resolution

Single frequency signal, searching

for higher order harmonics

Hanning

Better frequency resolution and

poorer amplitude resolution

compared with Rectangular

Sine, periodic, and narrow band

random noise

Hamming

A little bit better frequency

resolution than Hanning

Transient or short pulse, the signal

levels before and after the

multiplication are rather different

Flattop Measure the signals accurately

Measure the signal that has no

accurate reference and requires an

accurate measurement

Triangle Better frequency resolution

Measure the narrow band signal

and that has strong noise

interference

Color Grade

Click or tap the

Color Grade on/off switch to enable/disable the color grade display

of FFT operation results. When it is enabled, different colors are displayed on the

screen to indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability. Click or tap

the

Reset button for the Color Grade menu to clear the color grade display and

display the color grade again.

Math Operation

123

Label

It is used to set the label for the math operation results. For setting methods, refer to

descriptions in

To Turn the Channel Label Display On/Off

Grid

For setting methods, refer to the descriptions in

To Set the Screen Grid

Peak Search

Click or tap the icon

at the right side of Peak Search to enter the peak search

menu, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 9.9 Peak Search

• Peak Search ON/OFF: click or tap the Peak Search on/off switch to enable or

disable the display of the peak search window. By default, it is OFF.

• Peak Number: click or tap the input field for the

Peak Number menu item and

use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the number of peaks. You can also use

the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is from 1 to 15.

Its default value is 5.

• Threshold: click or tap the input field for the

Threshold menu item to set the

threshold of the peak with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The range of the threshold is

related to the current FFT scale and offset.

• Excursion: click or tap the

Excursion input field to set the excursion of the peak

or use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The minimum

value of Excursion is 0 and its unit is consistent with that of FFT.

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

124

• Table Order: in Table Order, select Amp Order or Freq Order as the sorting

mode. By default, it is "Amp Order".

Click or tap

Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You can export the

peak search results to the internal memory or the external USB storage device in CSV

format. In the menu, click or tap

File Name input field to set the file name; click or

tap

File Path input field and the disk management menu (

Disk Management

) is

displayed. Select the desired location to save the file and then click or tap

Save to

save the peak search results.

Clicking or tapping the icon

at the right side of Peak Search can close the peak

search menu.

9.4 Logic Operation

In the Math menu, click or tap the Operator drop-down button to select the desired

math operation. The logic operations supported by this oscilloscope include A&&B,

A||B, A^B, and !A. After selecting the desired logic operation in the drop-down button

Operator, you can configure its settings for the selected logic operation type.

Figure 9.10 Logic Operation Menu

• A&&B: Performs logic "AND" operation on the waveform voltage values of the

specified sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the

voltage value of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the

corresponding channel, it is regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The

results of logic AND operation of two binary bits are shown in

Table 9.2 Logic

Operation

Math Operation

125

• A||B: Performs logic "OR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the

specified sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the

voltage value of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the

corresponding channel, it is regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The

results of logic OR operation of two binary bits are shown in

Table 9.2 Logic

Operation

• A^B: Performs logic "XOR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the

specified sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the

voltage value of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the

corresponding channel, it is regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The

results of logic XOR operation of two binary bits are shown in

Table 9.2 Logic

Operation

• !A: Performs logic "NOT" operation on the waveform voltage values of the

specified sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the

voltage value of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the

corresponding channel, it is regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The

results of logic "NOT" operation of one binary bit are shown in

Table 9.2 Logic

Operation

Table 9.2 Logic Operation

A B A&&B A||B A^B !A

0 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 1 1

1 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0 0

Operation Result Display Window

Click or tap the

Operation on/off switch to enable the display of the operation result

window. The source and the waveform sizes parameters are displayed at the top of

the window, as shown in the figure below.

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

126

Source Waveform SizeLabel

Figure 9.11 Operation Result Display Window

Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of

SourceA or SourceB to select analog channels

CH1-CH4 or digital channels D0-D15 (available only when the digital channel probe is

connected). When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically

switches to the ON state.

Waveform Size

You can select "Small", "Medium", or "Large" as the the waveform display mode.

Offset

Offset is used to set the vertical offset of the operation result. You can set the vertical

offset in the following ways.

• In

Math menu, rotate the corresponding multipurpose knob on the front panel

or click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Offset to increase or

decrease the scale value. You can also click or tap the input field to input a

specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

• Close the menu and then adjust the vertical offset with the drag gesture on the

touch screen. You can also rotate the multipurpose knob 2 on the front panel to

adjust the vertical offset. Please refer to

Front Panel Overview

to configure the

front-panel multipurpose knobs.

Math Operation

127

Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the digital signal converted from the analog signal on the

source. Click or tap the

Sensitivity input field to set the sensitivity with the pop-up

numeric keypad or use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. For

details, refer to

Parameter Setting Method

Waveform

This oscilloscope provides Main and Zoom for the measurement range.

• Main indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base region.

• Zoom indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

To use "Zoom", first enable the

Zoom Mode (Delayed Sweep)

in the

Horizontal

System

menu.

Threshold

Click or tap the threshold input field of the specified channel and use the pop-up

numeric keypad to set the threshold or use the corresponding multipurpose knob to

set the value.

TIP

For the threshold of digital channels (D0-D15), refer to

To Set the Threshold

Label

It is used to set the label for the math operation results. For setting methods, refer to

descriptions in

To Turn the Channel Label Display On/Off

Grid

For setting methods, refer to the descriptions in

To Set the Screen Grid

9.5 Digital Filter

In the Math menu, click or tap the Operator drop-down button to select the desired

math operation. The digital filters supported by this oscilloscope include: low-pass

filter, high-pass filter, band-pass filter, and band-stop filter.

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

128

• LowPass only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current

upper limit frequency to pass.

• HighPass only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current

lower limit frequency to pass.

• BandPass only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current

lower limit frequency and lower than the current upper limit frequency to pass.

• BandStop only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current

lower limit frequency or higher than the current upper limit frequency to pass.

Figure 9.12 Digital Filter Menu

Operation Result Display Window

Click or tap the

Operation on/off switch to enable the display of the operation result

window. The source and the vertical scale parameters are displayed at the top of the

window as shown in the figure below.

Math Operation

129

Source

Vertical

Scal

Label

Sample

Rate

Figure 9.13 Operation Result Display Window

Source

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select from CH1-CH4 or Ref1-Ref10.

When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically switches to the

ON state.

TIP

Besides CH1-CH4 and Ref1-Ref10, the Math2 source can be set to Math1; the Math3 source

can be set to Math1 or Math2; the Math4 source can be set to Math1, Math2, or Math3.

Selecting a Math automatically enables its window display and sets its Operation on/off switch

to ON.

Auto Set

Click or tap

AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the operation

results to the optimal value according to the current configuration for you to better

observe.

Scale

Scale is used to set the vertical scale of the operation result. You can set the vertical

scale in the following ways.

• In

Math menu, rotate the corresponding multipurpose knob on the front panel

or click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Scale to increase or

decrease the scale value. You can also click or tap the input field to input a

specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

• Close the menu and then adjust the vertical scale with the pinch&stretch gesture

on the touch screen. You can also rotate the multipurpose knob 1 on the front

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

130

panel to adjust the vertical scale. Please refer to

Front Panel Overview

configure the front-panel multipurpose knobs.

Offset

Offset is used to set the vertical offset of the operation result. You can set the vertical

offset in the following ways.

• In

Math menu, rotate the corresponding multipurpose knob on the front panel

or click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Offset to increase or

decrease the scale value. You can also click or tap the input field to input a

specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

• Close the menu and then adjust the vertical offset with the drag gesture on the

touch screen. You can also rotate the multipurpose knob 2 on the front panel to

adjust the vertical offset. Please refer to

Front Panel Overview

to configure the

front-panel multipurpose knobs.

Invert

Invert is used to enable or disable the inverted display of the waveform. When the

Invert function is disabled, the waveform is displayed normally; when enabled, the

voltage values of the displayed waveform are inverted.

Waveform

This oscilloscope provides Main and Zoom for the measurement range.

• Main indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base region.

• Zoom indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

To use "Zoom", first enable the

Zoom Mode (Delayed Sweep)

in the

Horizontal

System

menu.

Frequency Limit

• LowPass: click or tap the

ωc input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the upper limit frequency or use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value.

• HighPass: click or tap the

ωc input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the lower limit frequency or use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value.

• BandPass: click or tap the

ωc1 input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad

to set the lower limit frequency. Click or tap the

ωc2 input field and use the pop-

up numeric keypad to set the upper limit frequency. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the lower/upper limit frequency.

Math Operation

131

• BandStop: click or tap the ωc1 input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad

to set the lower limit frequency. Click or tap the

ωc2 input field and use the pop-

up numeric keypad to set the upper limit frequency. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the lower/upper limit frequency.

The settable ranges of the upper and lower limit frequencies are related to the Math

sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is

enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory depth

can affect the Math sample rate.

Label

It is used to set the label for the math operation results. For setting methods, refer to

descriptions in

To Turn the Channel Label Display On/Off

Expand

The oscilloscope supports two vertical expansion modes: GND (default) and Center.

• GND: When the vertical scale is changed, the math operation waveform will

expand or compress about the ground level of the signal.

• Center: When the vertical scale is changed, the math operation waveform will

expand or compress about the center of the display.

Grid

For setting methods, refer to the descriptions in

To Set the Screen Grid

Math Operation

DHO900 User Guide

132

Measurements

DHO900 series oscilloscope provides the quick measurements after "Auto" is selected,

auto measurements for 41 waveform parameters, as well as the cursor measurement

function.

10.1 Auto Scale

When the oscilloscope is correctly connected and has detected a valid input signal,

click or tap the function navigation icon

> Auto or press the front-panel

key to enable the waveform auto setting function and open the auto setting function

menu.

• Click or tap the first icon, and then two periods of the signal are automatically

displayed on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements for the

"period" and "frequency" of the currently displayed waveform. The measurement

results are displayed in the "Result" bar at the right side of the screen.

• Click or tap the second icon, and then multiple periods of the signal are

automatically displayed on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make

measurements for the "period" and "frequency" of the currently displayed

waveforms in multiple periods. The measurement results are displayed in the

"Result" bar at the right side of the screen.

• Click or tap the third icon to enable the "rise time" measurement item. The

measurement results are displayed in the "Result" bar at the right side of the

screen. By default, it is intended for the fast edge signal.

• Click or tap the fourth icon to enable the "fall time" measurement item. The

measurement results are displayed in the "Result" bar at the right side of the

screen. By default, it is intended for the fast edge signal.

• Click or tap the fifth icon to cancel the auto setting and recovers to the

parameter settings prior to clicking or tapping

Auto.

• Click or tap the sixth icon to enter the

Auto Config sub-menu under the Utility

menu. For details, please refer to

Auto Config

TIP

The waveform auto setting function requires that the frequency of the signal should be greater

than or equal to 35 Hz, and the amplitude greater than or equal to 10 mV. If those conditions

are not met, the waveform auto setting function may be invalid.

Measurements

133

10.2 Auto Measurements

You can enter the Measure menu in the following ways.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select

Measure to enter the "Measure" menu.

• Press the front-panel

key to enter the "Measure" menu.

• Click or tap the Measure button on the toolbar to enter the "Measure" menu.

• In

Vertical System

menu, click or tap the Measure button to enter the "Measure"

menu.

10.2.1 Measurement Parameter

This oscilloscope allows you to set the measurement source, enable or disable the all

measurement function, the statistical function, and etc. You can make quick

measurements for many waveform parameters. The measurement results will be

displayed in the

Result sidebar at the right section of the screen.

TIP

If there is no signal input for the current source or the measurement result is not within the

valid range (too large or too small), then the measurement results are invalid, and "*****" is

displayed on the screen. Please re-input the signal or set the signal.

10.2.1.1 Time Parameters

Threshold

Middle Value

Threshold

Upper Limit

Rise Time Fall Time

+Width

- Width

Period

Threshold

Lower Limit

Figure 10.1 Time Parameters

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

134

• Period: defined as the time between the middle threshold points of two

consecutive, like-polarity edges.

• Frequency: defined as the reciprocal of period.

• Rise Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold

lower limit to the threshold upper limit.

• Fall Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold

upper limit to the threshold lower limit.

• +Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a rising edge

to the threshold middle value of the next falling edge.

• -Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a falling edge

to the threshold middle value of the next rising edge.

• +Duty: indicates the ratio of the positive pulse width to the period.

• -Duty: indicates the ratio of the negative pulse width to the period.

• Tvmax: indicates the time that corresponds to the maximum value of the

waveform (Vmax).

• Tvmin: indicates the time that corresponds to the minimum value of the

waveform (Vmin).

The default values for threshold upper limit, threshold middle value, and threshold

lower limit are 90%, 50%, and 10%, respectively.

10.2.1.2 Count Values

The default values for threshold upper limit and threshold lower limit are 90% and

10%, respectively.

Positive Pulse Count

It is specified as the number of positive pulses that rise from under the threshold

lower limit to above the threshold upper limit.

Positive Pulse Count = n

1 n2

Threshold

Upper Limit

Threshold

Lower Limit

Measurements

135

Negative Pulse Count

It is specified as the number of negative pulses that fall from above the threshold

upper limit to below the threshold lower limit.

1 n2

Negative Pulse Count = n

Threshold

Upper Limit

Threshold

Lower Limit

Rising Edge Count

It is specified as the number of rising edges that rise from under the threshold lower

limit to above the threshold upper limit.

1 n2

Rising Edge Count = n

Threshold

Upper Limit

Threshold

Lower Limit

Falling Edge Count

It is specified as the number of falling edges that fall from above the threshold

upper limit to below the threshold lower limit.

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

136

1 n2

Falling Edge Count = n

Threshold

Upper Limit

Threshold

Lower Limit

10.2.1.3 Delay and Phase Parameters

Source A

Source B

Period

Delay

Figure 10.2 Delay and Phase Parameters

1. Delay(r-r): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values of

the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay indicates that

the rising edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.

2. Delay(f-f): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values of

the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay indicates that

the falling edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.

3. Delay(r-f): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values of

the rising edge of Source A and the falling edge of Source B. Negative delay

indicates that the rising edge of Source A occurred after the falling edge of

Source B.

4. Delay(f-r): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values of

the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. Negative delay

indicates that the falling edge of Source A occurred after the rising edge of

Source B.

5. Phase(r-r): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle values of

the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. The phase formula is as follows:

Measurements

137

°360×=

sourceA

Period

BDelayA

BPhaseA

Wherein,

PhaseA

represents Phase(r-r),

DelayA

represents Delay(r-r), and

Period

sourceA

represents the period of Source A.

6. Phase(f-f): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle values of

the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. The phase formula is as follows:

°360×=

sourceA

Period

BDelayA

BPhaseA

Wherein,

PhaseA

represents Phase (f-f),

DelayA

represents Delay(f-f), and

Period

sourceA

represents the period of Source A.

7. Phase(r-f): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle values of

the rising edge of Source A and the falling edge of Source B. The phase formula is

as follows:

°360×=

sourceA

Period

BDelayA

BPhaseA

Wherein,

PhaseA

represents Phase (r-f),

DelayA

represents Delay(r-f), and

Period

sourceA

represents the period of Source A.

8. Phase(f-r): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle values of

the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. The phase formula is

as follows:

°360×=

sourceA

Period

BDelayA

BPhaseA

Wherein,

PhaseA

represents Phase (f-r),

DelayA

represents Delay(f-r), and

Period

sourceA

represents the period of Source A.

TIP

• Source A and Source B can be any channel among CH1-CH4, D0-D15, and Math1-

Math4.

• The default threshold middle value is 50%.

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

138

10.2.1.4 Voltage Parameters

Vpp

Vtop

Vbase

Overshoot

Vmax

Vmin

Vupper

Vmid

Vlower

Preshoot

Vamp

Figure 10.3 Voltage Parameters

1. Vmax: indicates the voltage value from the highest point of the waveform to the

GND.

2. Vmin: indicates the voltage value from the lowest point of the waveform to the

GND.

3. Vpp: indicates the voltage value from the highest point to the lowest point of the

waveform.

4. Vtop: indicates the voltage value from the flat top of the waveform to the GND.

5. Vbase: indicates the voltage value from the flat base of the waveform to the GND.

6. Vamp: indicates the voltage value from the top of the waveform to the base of

the waveform.

7. Vupper: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold

maximum value.

8. Vmid: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold middle

value.

9. Vlower: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold

minimum value.

10. Vavg: indicates the arithmetic average value on the whole waveform or in the

gating area. The formula is shown as follows:

Average

∑

Measurements

139

Wherein,

is the

ith

point, and

is the number of points being measured.

11. VRMS: indicates the root mean square value on the whole waveform or in the

gating area. The formula is as follows:

RMS

∑

Wherein,

is the measurement result of the

ith

point, and

is the number of

points being measured.

12. Per.VRMS: indicates the root mean square value within a period. The formula is

as shown above.

13. Overshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the maximum value and

the top value of the waveform to the amplitude value.

14. Preshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the minimum value and

the base value of the waveform to the amplitude value.

15. AC RMS: indicates the root-mean-square value of the waveforms, with the DC

component removed. The formula is shown as follows:

Averagex

DevS

∑

)(

.td

−

Wherein,

is the amplitude of the

ith

point,

Average

is the waveform average

value, and

is the number of points being measured.

10.2.1.5 Other Parameters

• Positive Slew Rate: On the rising edge, first calculate the difference between

the high value and the low value, then use the difference to divide the

corresponding time value to obtain the positive slew rate.

• Negative Slew Rate: On the falling edge, first calculate the difference between

the low value and the high value, then use the difference to divide the

corresponding time value to obtain the negative slew rate.

• Area: indicates the area of the whole waveform within the screen. The unit is

V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the vertical

offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero reference is

negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the area of the whole

waveform within the screen.

• Period Area: indicates the area of the first period of waveform on the screen.

The unit is V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the

vertical offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

140

reference is negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the whole

period area.

10.2.2 Select the Measurement Item

In the Measure menu, click or tap Horizontal, Vertical, or Other to go to the desired

menu. You can also slide to select the measurement item to enter the corresponding

interface, as shown in

Figure 10.4

Figure 10.5

, and

Figure 10.6

. Click or tap any of

the measurement items to enable the measurements. This series allows you to enable

measurements of up to 14 items at the same time.

TIP

You can also refer to

Multi-pane Windowing

to enable all measurements.

• Vertical: Vmax, Vmin, Vpp, Vtop, Vbase, Vamp, Vupper, Vmid, Vlower, Vavg,

VRMS, Per. VRMS, Overshoot, Preshoot, Area, Per.Area, and AC.RMS.

Figure 10.4 Vertical Measurement Items

• Horizontal: Period, Frequency, Rise Time, Fall Time, +Width, -Width, +Duty, -

Duty, Positive Pulse Count, Negative Pulse Count, Rising Edge Count, Falling

Edge Count, Tvmax, Tvmin, +Slew Rate, and -Slew Rate.

Measurements

141

Figure 10.5 Horizontal Measurement Items

• Other: Delay (r-r), Delay (r-f), Delay (f-r), Delay (f-f), Phase (r-r), Phase (r-f),

Phase(f-r), and Phase (f-f).

Figure 10.6 Other Measurement Items

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

142

10.2.3 Measurement Settings

In the Measure menu, click or tap the Setting button to enter the measurement

setting menu.

Figure 10.7 Measurement Settings Menu

Histogram

Click or tap the

Histogram on/off switch to enable or disable the histogram function.

After the histogram function is enabled, the Measure Histogram view is displayed on

the screen, as shown in the figure below. The histogram analysis result label is

displayed in the

Result sidebar (refer to

Histogram Analysis Results

NOTE

Add at least one measurement item (

Select the Measurement Item

) before enabling the

Measure Histogram function.

Measurements

143

After the Measure Histogram function is enabled, please refer to

Select the

Measurement Item

to add new measurement parameter. The new parameter will be

used as the measurement item. In the "Result" sidebar, you can also click or tap the

label of the added measurement parameter (e.g. "Vpp" and "Vmin") to change the

measurement item.

Indicator

Click or tap the

Indicator on/off switch to enable or disable the indicator.

If enabled, one or more cursors will be displayed on the screen. Before enabling the

indicator, you need to enable at least one auto measurement parameter and the

number of cursors will change with the measurement parameter enabled.

TIP

When no measurement parameter is selected or there is no source input, the indicator is not

available. The indicator changes when the waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally.

Measurement Threshold

• First, select

% or Abs as the display type.

• Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired channel. You

can select from CH1-CH4, D0-D15, or Math1-Math4. D0-D15 are available only

when the digital channel probe is connected.

• Click or tap the input field of Upper and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the upper limit of the measurement or use the corresponding multipurpose

knob to set the value. When the upper limit is set to be smaller than or equal to

the current middle value, a prompt message "Set at lower limit" is displayed.

Then, the oscilloscope will automatically adjust the upper limit and make it

greater than the middle value. By default, it is 90%. The default absolute value

varies with the vertical setting of the channel.

• Click or tap the input field of

Mid and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

middle value of the measurement or use the corresponding multipurpose knob

to set the value. The middle value is limited by the settings of the upper limit

and lower limit. By default, it is 50%. The default absolute value varies with the

vertical setting of the channel.

• Click or tap the input field of

Lower and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the lower limit of the measurement or use the corresponding multipurpose knob

to set the value. When the lower limit is set to be greater than or equal to the

current middle value, a prompt message "Set at upper limit" is displayed. Then,

the oscilloscope will automatically adjust the lower limit and make it smaller than

the middle value. By default, it is 10%. The default absolute value varies with the

vertical setting of the channel.

• Click or tap

Default to return the upper, middle, and lower limits to their default

values.

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

144

Click or tap the Threshold on/off switch to enable or disable the threshold settings.

TIP

Modifying the threshold will affect the measurement results of time, delay, and phase

parameters.

Measurement Range

Click or tap the drop-down button of the

Region to select "Main" or "Zoom".

• Main: indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base region.

• Zoom: indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

TIP

To use "Zoom", you need to enable the

Zoom Mode (Delayed Sweep)

first.

Amplitude Measurement Method

Click or tap

Auto or Manual as the amplitude measurement method, which affects

the measurement method for the top and base values

If you select "Manual", set the following parameters:

• Click or tap the

Top toggle button to select Histogram or Max-Min as the top

value measurement method.

• Click or tap the

Base toggle button to select Histogram or Max-Min as the base

value measurement method.

TIP

If you select "Manual" for the amplitude method, the measurement results of other parameters

may be affected.

"Histogram" and "Max-Min" are the internal measurement algorithm for the oscilloscope. The

"Histogram" method mentioned above is different from the Histogram function of the

oscilloscope.

Remove the Measurement Results

Refer to

Remove the Measurement Results

Measurements

145

Statistics

Click or tap the

Statistic on/off switch to enable or disable the statistical result

display. You can also click or tap

at the lower-right of the measurement item in

the "Result" sidebar to expand the label to display all the statistical items. Click or tap

to collapse the label. The figure below shows the displayed results after the

Statistic of period measurement is enabled.

• Click or tap any measurement item in the "Result" sidebar at the right side of the

screen and a window is displayed. Click or tap

Reset Stat. to clear the history

statistics data and makes statistics again. You can also click or tap

Reset Stat. in

the measurement setting menu.

• Click or tap the input field of

Count and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the count value. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value. Its range is from 2 to 100000. Its default value is 1000.

10.2.4 Remove the Measurement Results

This oscilloscope allows you to delete the measurement results of the parameters.

• In

Measure setting menu, click or tap Remove to delete the currently selected

measurement item that you've added; click or tap

Remove All to delete all the

displayed measurement items.

• Click or tap any measurement item in the "Result" sidebar at the right side of the

screen and a window is displayed. Click or tap

Remove to delete the currently

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

146

selected measurement item that you've added; click or tap Remove All to delete

all the displayed measurement items.

• In the "Result" sidebar, select a measurement item and drag it to the right to

delete it quickly

10.3 Cursor Measurements

Cursor measurement can measure the X axis values (e.g. Time) and Y axis values (e.g.

Voltage) of the selected waveform. Before making cursor measurements, connect the

signal to the oscilloscope to acquire stable display. The cursor measurement function

provides the following two cursors.

Figure 10.8 Cursors

• X Cursor

X cursor is a vertical solid/dotted line that is used to make horizontal

adjustments. It can be used to measure time (s) and frequency (Hz).

- Cursor A is a vertical solid line (

is displayed at the bottom of the screen),

and Cursor B is a vertical dotted line (

is displayed at the bottom of the

screen).

- In the XY cursor mode, X cursor is used to measure the waveform

amplitude of Source X.

• Y Cursor

Y cursor is a horizontal solid/dotted line that is used to make vertical

adjustments. It can be used to measure amplitude (the unit is the same as that of

the source channel amplitude).

Measurements

147

- Cursor A is a horizontal solid line ( is displayed at the right section of

the screen), and Cursor B is a horizontal dotted line (

is displayed at the

right section of the screen).

- In XY cursor mode, Y cursor is used to measure the waveform amplitude of

Source Y.

You can enable cursor measurements in the following ways.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

> Cursors to enable cursor

measurements.

• Click or tap the

Cursors button on the toolbar to enable cursor measurements.

• Press the front-panel

key to enable cursor measurements.

The measurement results are displayed in the "Result" bar at the right side of the

screen.

• AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.

• AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.

• BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.

• BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.

• ∆X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.

• ∆Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

148

• 1/∆X: indicates the reciprocal of the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and

Cursor B.

Click or tap the result bar and then select

Remove or Setting in the pop-up window.

• Click or tap

Remove. Then the current cursor measurement results will be

cleared.

• Click or tap

Setting. Then the "Cursors" menu is displayed. You can select the

cursor mode: Manual, Track, and XY.

10.3.1 Manual Mode

In the manual cursor mode, you can adjust the cursor manually to measure the value

of the waveforms of the specified source at the current cursor. If the settings for the

parameter such as the cursor type and measurement source are different, the

measurement results will be different for cursor measurement.

In the

Cursors menu, click or tap Manual for the Mode item to enable the Manual

cursor measurement function. The measurement results are displayed in the "Result"

bar at the right side of the screen. When you change the cursor position, the

measurement results will be changed accordingly.

Figure 10.9 Manual Mode Setting Menu

Select the Measurement Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Source to select the desired channel (None,

CH1-CH4, LA or Math1-Math4).

When a specified channel is selected as the source, it will be automatically turned on.

Select Cursor Type

Click or tap the

Select toggle button to select "X" or "Y".

Measurements

149

• X: It is a pair of vertical solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for

measuring time parameters. The measurement results include AX, BX, ∆X, and 1/

∆X.

• Y: It is a pair of horizontal solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for

measuring voltage parameters. The measurement results include AY, BY, and ∆Y.

Adjust Cursor Position

1. When "X" is selected, you can adjust the position of X cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of

AX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

horizontal position of Cursor A (X cursors). The horizontal axis indicates time,

and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the horizontal unit. Its

adjustable range is limited within the screen.

- Click or tap the input field of

BX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

horizontal position of Cursor B (X cursors). The horizontal axis indicates time,

and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the horizontal unit. Its

adjustable range is limited within the screen.

- Click or tap the

AX BX on/off switch to turn on/off adjusting the horizontal

position of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) simultaneously. The horizontal

spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.

2. When "Y" is selected, you can adjust the position of Y cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of

AY, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the vertical position of Cursor A (Y cursors). The vertical axis indicates

voltage, and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the vertical unit.

- Click or tap the input field of BY and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

vertical position of Cursor B (Y cursor). The vertical axis indicates voltage, and

the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the vertical unit.

- Click or tap the AY BY on/off switch to turn on/off adjusting the vertical

position of Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) simultaneously. The vertical

spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) remains unchanged.

You can also use the front-panel multipurpose knob

to adjust the cursor

position. To configure the multipurpose knobs, please refer to

Front Panel Overview

Measurement Example

Measure the period of a sine wave by using the manual cursor measurement and

auto measurement respectively. The measurement results are both 200 ns.

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

150

Auto Measurement

Cursor Measurement

Figure 10.10 Manual Cursor Measurement Example

Disable the Cursor Measurement Function

When cursor measurement is enabled, you can disable it in the following ways:

• In the

Cursors menu, click or tap the Remove button to disable cursor

measurements.

• In the "Result" bar at the right side of the screen, click or tap the "Cursors" label

and then click or tap

Remove in the pop-up window.

• In the "Result" bar at the right side of the screen, drag the "Cursors" label to the

right to simply disable cursor measurements.

• Press the front-panel

key to disable cursor measurements.

10.3.2 Track Mode

In the Track mode, you can adjust the two pairs of cursors (Cursor A and Cursor B) to

measure the X and Y values on two different sources respectively. When the cursors

are moved horizontally/vertically, the markers will position on the waveform

automatically. When the waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally/vertically,

the markers will track the points being marked at the last adjustment of the cursors.

In the Cursors menu, click or tap Track for the Mode item to enable the Track cursor

measurement function. The measurement results are displayed in the "Result" bar at

the right section of the screen.

Measurements

151

Figure 10.11 Track Mode Setting Menu

Select the Measurement Source

• Click or tap the drop-down button of AX Source to select the desired channel

(None, CH1-CH4, or Math1-Math4).

• Click or tap the drop-down button of

BX Source to select the desired channel

(None, CH1-CH4, or Math1-Math4).

When a specified channel is selected as the source, it will be automatically turned on.

Select the Track Mode

Click or tap the

Track toggle button to select "X" or "Y" as the current track axis. By

default, it is "X".

• X: When the X cursor position is adjusted, Y cursor will automatically track the

intersection point between X cursor and source signal

• Y: When the Y cursor position is adjusted, X cursor will automatically track the

intersection point between Y cursor and source signal.

Adjust Cursor Position

• When "X" is selected, you can adjust the position of X cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of AX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the horizontal position of Cursor A (X cursors). Its adjustable range is

limited within the screen.

- Click or tap the input field of BX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the horizontal position of Cursor B (X cursors). Its adjustable range is

limited within the screen.

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

152

- Click or tap the AX BX on/off switch to turn on/off adjusting the horizontal

position of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) simultaneously. The horizontal

spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.

• When "Y" is selected, you can adjust the position of Y cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of

AY, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad

to set the vertical position of Cursor A (Y cursors).

- Click or tap the input field of

BY and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the vertical position of Cursor B (Y cursor).

- Click or tap the

AY BY on/off switch to turn on/off adjusting the vertical

position of Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) simultaneously. The vertical

spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) remains unchanged.

You can also use the front-panel multipurpose knob

to adjust the cursor

position. To configure the multipurpose knobs, please refer to

Front Panel Overview

Measurement Example

Set the

AX Source to CH1, BX Source to CH2, and Track to "X".

When the AX cursor position is adjusted, AY cursor will automatically track the

intersection point between AX cursor and source signal (CH1); When the BX cursor

position is adjusted, BY cursor will automatically track the intersection point between

BX cursor and source signal (CH2). The measurement results are displayed in the

"Result" bar, as shown in

Figure 10.12

. Then, expand the waveforms horizontally, and

you will find that the cursor will track the point that has been marked, as shown in

Figure 10.13

Figure 10.12 Track Measurement (before Horizontal Expansion)

Measurements

153

Figure 10.13 Track Measurement (after Horizontal Expansion)

Disable the Cursor Measurement Function

When cursor measurement is enabled, you can disable it in the following ways:

• In the

Cursors menu, click or tap the Remove button to disable cursor

measurements.

• In the "Result" bar at the right side of the screen, click or tap the "Cursors" label

and then click or tap

Remove in the pop-up window.

• In the "Result" bar at the right side of the screen, drag the "Cursors" label to the

right to simply disable cursor measurements.

• Press the front-panel

key to disable cursor measurements.

10.3.3 XY Mode

In the Cursors menu, click or tap XY for the Mode item to enable the XY cursor

measurement function. The measurement results are displayed in the "Result" bar at

the right section of the screen.

Figure 10.14 XY Mode Setting Menu

Measurements

DHO900 User Guide

154

TIP

By default, XY mode is unavailable. It is available only when the horizontal time base mode is

"XY". To enable the XY mode, please refer to

Enable the XY Mode

Adjust Cursor Position

• Click or tap to select the "X" tab under the

Select menu item to set the X value

for the specified cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of

AX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the X value at Cursor A.

- Click or tap the input field of

BX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the X value at Cursor B.

- Click or tap the

AX BX on/off switch to turn on/off adjusting the X value at

Cursor A and the X value at Cursor B simultaneously.

• Click or tap to select "Y" under the

Select item to set the Y value for the

specified cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of

AY and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the Y value at Cursor A.

- Click or tap the input field of

BY and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the Y value at Cursor B.

- Click or tap to the

AY BY on/off switch to turn on/off adjusting the Y value

at Cursor A and the Y value at Cursor B simultaneously.

You can also use the front-panel multipurpose knob

to adjust the cursor

position. To configure the multipurpose knobs, please refer to

Front Panel Overview

During the adjustment, the measurement results will change accordingly. The

adjustable range is limited within the screen.

Disable the Cursor Measurement Function

When cursor measurement is enabled, you can disable it in the following ways:

• In the

Cursors menu, click or tap the Remove button to disable cursor

measurements.

• In the "Result" bar at the right side of the screen, click or tap the "Cursors" label

and then click or tap

Remove in the pop-up window.

• In the "Result" bar at the right side of the screen, drag the "Cursors" label to the

right to simply disable cursor measurements.

• Press the front-panel

key to disable cursor measurements.

Measurements

155

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency

Counter

This series oscilloscope provides a built-in digital voltmeter (DVM) and frequency

counter, which enable you to perform more accurate measurements, improving user

experience in counter and frequency measurement.

11.1 Digital Voltmeter (DVM)

The built-in DVM of this oscilloscope provides 4-digit voltage measurements on any

analog channel. DVM measurements are asynchronous from the oscilloscope's

acquisition system and are always acquiring. You can enable the DVM measurements

in the following ways.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

> DVM to enable DVM

measurements.

• Click or tap the

DVM button on the toolbar to enable DVM measurements.

• Press the front-panel

key and then select DVM in the displayed "Analyse"

menu to enable the DVM measurements.

After the DVM measurements are enabled, the "DVM" label appears in the "Result"

bar at the right section of the screen, as shown in the figure below.

Source

Voltage Value

Mode

DVM Bandwidth

The voltage value in the label shows the measurement extrema over the last 3

seconds.

Click or tap the "DVM" label and then a window is displayed. Click or tap

Setting to

enter the DVM setting menu as shown in

Figure 11.1

. You can click or tap Remove to

disable DVM measurements.

11.1.1 Measurement Settings

After the DVM is enabled, click or tap the "DVM" label in the "Result" bar at the right

section of the screen and a window is displayed. Click or tap

Setting in the window to

enter the DVM setting menu, as shown in the figure below.

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter

DHO900 User Guide

156

Figure 11.1 DVM Setting Menu

Select the Measurement Source

Click or tap the

Source drop-down button to select the desired source. The analog

channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the measurement source.

Even if the analog channel (CH1-CH4) is not enabled, you can still perform the DVM

measurements.

Select the Measurement Mode

In the

Mode item, you can select the DVM mode. The DVM measurement modes

include AC RMS, DC, and AC+DC RMS.

• AC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data, with the DC

component removed.

• DC: displays the average value of the acquired data.

• AC+DC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data.

Set the Limits

Click or tap the

Beeper on/off switch to turn on or off the beeper. When the beeper is

turned on, you can enable the beeper to sound an alarm when the voltage value is

inside or outside the limited range.

• Limits Condition Setting

Click or tap the

When toggle button to select "In Limits" or "Out Limits".

- In Limits: when the voltage value is inside the limited range, you can enable

or disable the beeper to sound an alarm.

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter

157

- Out Limits: when the voltage value is outside the limited range, you can

enable or disable the beeper to sound an alarm.

• Upper/Lower Limit Setting

Click or tap the input field of

Upper, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the upper limit of the voltage or use the corresponding multipurpose knob to

set the value.

Click or tap the input field of

Lower, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the lower limit of the voltage or use the corresponding multipurpose knob to

set the value.

11.1.2 Remove the Measurement

Click or tap the "DVM" label in the "Result" bar and a window is displayed. Click or

tap

Remove to disable DVM measurements and clear the measurement results. You

can also click or tap

Remove in the DVM setting menu to disable the function.

11.2 Frequency Counter

The frequency counter analysis function provides frequency, period, or edge event

counter measurements on any analog channel.

You can enable the counter in the following ways:

• Click or tap

> Counter to enable the counter.

• Click or tap the Counter button on the toolbar to enable the counter.

• Press the front-panel

key and then select Counter in the displayed

"Analyse" menu to enable the counter.

After the counter is enabled, the "Counter" label displaying the counter measurement

results appears in the "Result" bar at the right section of the screen, as shown in the

figure below. You can set the

Statistic switch to "ON" in "Counter" menu to enable

the statistical results. You can refer to

Statistics Results

Source

Value

Measurement Item

Results

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter

DHO900 User Guide

158

You can click or tap the "Counter" label in the "Result" bar and select Reset Stat.,

Setting, or Remove in the displayed window.

11.2.1 Measurement Settings

After the frequency counter is enabled, click or tap the "Counter" label in the "Result"

bar at the right section of the screen and a window is displayed. Click or tap

Setting

in the window to enter the counter setting menu, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 11.2 Frequency Counter Setting Menu

Select the Measurement Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Source to select the desired source. Analog

channels (CH1-CH4) and digital Channels (D0-D15) can be selected as the source of

the frequency counter.

NOTE

Only when the digital channel probe is connected, can you select digital channels D0-D15 as

the source.

Set Resolution

For Period and Frequency measurements, you need to set the readout resolution.

Click or tap the input field of

Resolution to set the resolution by using the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the

value. The range of resolution is from 3 bits to 6 bits. By default, it is 4 bits.

The greater the resolution, the longer the gate time. In this way, the measurement

time will be longer.

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter

159

Select the Measurement Item

In the

Measure item, you can select the desired measurement item. Available options

include Frequency, Period, and Totalize. Wherein, Totalize indicates the count of edge

events on the signal.

Clear Count

When "Totalize" is selected as the measurement item, the oscilloscope measures the

count of edge events on the signal. At this time, click or tap

Clear Count to clear the

measurement results and start the measurements again.

Statistics Results

When "Frequency" or "Period" is selected, click or tap the

Statistic on/off switch to

turn on/off displaying all statistical items. When enabled, all the statistical results will

be displayed in the "Counter" label in the "Result" bar.

11.2.2 Reset Statistics

Click or tap the "Counter" label in the "Result" bar at the right section of the screen

and a window is displayed. Click or tap

Reset Stat. in the window to reset the

statistics.

11.2.3 Remove the Measurement

Click or tap the "Counter" label in the "Result" bar at the right section of the screen

and a window is displayed. Click or tap

Remove to clear the measurement results. The

"Counter" label disappears from the "Result" bar accordingly. You can also click or tap

Remove in the counter setting menu to disable the function.

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) and Frequency Counter

DHO900 User Guide

160

Digital Channel

DHO900 series oscilloscope provides a standard logic analyzer (LA) function with 16

digital channels. The default channel label is D0-D15. The oscilloscope compares the

voltages acquired in each sample with the preset logic threshold. If the voltage of the

sample point is above the threshold, it will be stored as logic 1; otherwise, it will be

stored as logic 0. The oscilloscope displays the logic levels (1s and 0s) in a graphic

way for you to easily detect and analyze the errors in circuit design (hardware design

and software design).

You can enter the LA menu in the following ways.

• Press the front-panel

key to enter the menu.

• Click or tap the "LA" label at the bottom of the screen to enter the menu.

Figure 12.1 LA Menu

Before using the digital channels, connect the oscilloscope to the device under test

(DUT) using the optional PLA2216 active logic probe. To cater to different application

scenarios, PLA2216 provides two methods to connect the signal under test. For

details, refer to

PLA2216 Active Logic Probe User Guide

CAUTION

The digital channel input terminal does not support hot plugging. Do not insert or pull

out the logic probe when the instrument is powered on.

Digital Channel

161

12.1 To Enable or Disable the Digital Channel

Press the front-panel key or click or tap the LA label at the bottom of the

screen to enable/disable digital channels

D0-D15 at the same time.

In the menu as shown in

Figure 12.1

, click or tap the check box of any digital channel

from

D0 to D15 to enable/disable the specified channel. You can click or tap the

check box of

D0-D7 to enable/disable all channels from D0 to D7. Similarly, click or

tap the check box of

D8-D15 to enable/disable all channels from D8 to D15. The

check box turns into

once the corresponding channel is enabled while the check

box of disabled channel is

TIP

When you use

D0-D7 or D8-D15 to enable or disable multiple channels simultaneously, you

can still enable or disable any channel independently.

12.2 To Select the Digital Channel

After the digital channel is enabled, click or tap the label or waveform of the digital

channel. Select any channel from D0 to D15. The waveform of the selected channel is

in red.

TIP

Only the enabled digital channel can be selected.

12.3 To Set the Threshold

The threshold levels of channels D0-D7 and channels D8-D15 can be set separately

according to your needs. If the voltage of the input signal is above the threshold, it is

treated as logic 1; otherwise, it is treated as logic 0.

• In the menu as shown in

Figure 12.1

, click or tap the Threshold input field at

the right side of

D0-D7, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

threshold for D0-D7. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to

set the value.

• In the menu as shown in

Figure 12.1

, click or tap the Threshold input field at

the right side of

D8-D15, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

threshold for D8-D15. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to

set the value.

Digital Channel

DHO900 User Guide

162

12.4 To Set the Waveform Size

In the menu as shown in

Figure 12.1

, click or tap the Size drop-down button to select

the waveform display size. Available options include "Small", "Medium", and "Large".

TIP

"Large" is available only when the number of currently enabled channels is not greater than 8.

12.5 To Set the Order

In the menu as shown in

Figure 12.1

, click or tap the Arrange drop-down button to

select the waveform arrangement order for the currently enabled channels on the

display.

• D0-D15: the waveforms on the display are D0-D15 in sequence from top to

bottom.

• D15-D0: the waveforms on the display are D15-D0 in sequence from top to

bottom.

You can also drag the digital channel waveform in the waveform view to change the

order.

12.6 Probe Calibration

If the PLA2216 active logic probe is connected to the oscilloscope for the first time or

when the changes of the ambient temperature are above 5℃, it is recommended to

perform zero calibration for the probe. Make sure that no signal is applied to the

PLA2216 input terminal when the probe is under calibration.

Figure 12.1

, click or tap ProbeCalibration to enter the "ProbeCalibration" menu.

Click or tap

Start to start zero calibration automatically for the probe.

12.7 Label Settings

By default, the instrument takes D0-D15 as the channel label of the 16 digital

channels. You can set a user-defined label for each digital channel to easily

differentiate the digital channels.

In the LA menu, click or tap

Label settings to enter the Label settings menu. You can

then use the preset label or input a label manually.

Label On/Off

Click or tap the

Label Enable on/off switch to enable or disable the label display. If it

is on, the channel label will be displayed at the left side of the waveform.

Digital Channel

163

Select a Specified Digital Channel

Click or tap the

ChanSelect drop-down button to select a digital channel. You can

select any channel from D0 to D15.

Use Preset Labels

Click or tap the

Label library drop-down button to select a preset label. Available

preset labels include ACK, ADO, ADDR, BIT, CAS, CLK, CS, DATA, HALT, INT, LOAD,

NMI, OUT, RAS, PIN, RDY, RST, RX, TX, WR, MISO, MOSI, and D0-D15.

Input a Label Manually

Click or tap the

Edit input field and use the pop-up virtual keypad to set the label. For

the methods of using the virtual keypad, refer to

Parameter Setting Method

Digital Channel

DHO900 User Guide

164

Histogram Analysis

The histogram analysis function can provide the statistic view for waveform and

measurement results, enabling you to judge the trend of waveforms, and quickly

locate the potential problems of the signal. This series oscilloscope supports

histogram types including Horizontal, Vertical, and Measure. For the Measure

Histogram function, refer to

Histogram

of the "Measurements" chapter. This chapter

only introduces the Horizontal and Vertical histogram.

Click or tap the function navigation icon

and select Histogram to enter the

Histogram menu.

Figure 13.1 Histogram Menu

13.1 To Enable or Disable the Histogram Function

In Histogram menu, click or tap the Enable on/off switch to enable or disable the

histogram analysis. After the histogram function is enabled, with the on-going

acquisition and measurement of the waveforms, the height of the bar graph will

change within the set range of the histogram window to indicate the number of times

for data statistics.

Take horizontal histogram as an example. After the histogram function is enabled, the

histogram analysis view as shown in the figure below is displayed on the screen. Also,

the "Histogram" label appears on the

Result bar at the right side of the screen.

Histogram Analysis

165

Figure 13.2 Histogram Analysis Interface

When the histogram function is enabled, you can click or tap the "Histogram" label >

Setting to open the histogram setting menu. You can also click or tap the histogram

plot area to quickly open the histogram setting menu.

TIP

For definitions of the measurement items in the "Histogram" label, refer to

Histogram Analysis

Results

13.2 To Select the Histogram Type

In the Histogram menu, click or tap the Type drop-down button to select the

histogram type.

• Horizontal: displays the number of times for statistics making in the forms of

columns in the histogram bar graph at the bottom of the graticule.

• Vertical: displays the number of times for statistics making in the forms of rows

in the histogram bar graph at the left of the graticule.

13.3 To Select the Histogram Source

In the Histogram menu, Click or tap the Source drop-down button to select the

desired source. The analog channels (CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the histogram

source.

13.4 To Set the Histogram Height

The histogram height indicates the number of grids the histogram bar graph should

use on the screen.

Histogram Analysis

DHO900 User Guide

166

In Histogram menu, click or tap the input field of Height, and then use the pop-up

numeric keypad to set the height. It ranges from 1 div to 4 div, and the default is 2

div.

13.5 To Set the Histogram Range

You need to set the histogram window range. Adjust the size and position of the

histogram window by setting the "Left Limit", "Right Limit", "Top Limit", and "Bottom

Limit" respectively.

• Click or tap the Left Limit input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the value. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the

value.

• Click or tap the Right Limit input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the value. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the

value.

• Click or tap the Top Limit input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the value. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the

value.

• Click or tap the Bottom Limit input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the value. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the

value.

NOTE

Adjusting the horizontal time base or vertical scale will not affect the histogram limit range,

but only shows variation with the scale.

TIP

You can also drag the histogram window in white to adjust the window's size and position.

13.6 Histogram Analysis Results

After the histogram analysis function is enabled, the "Histogram" label will be

displayed in the

Result sidebar, as shown in the figure below. Note that when the

histogram type is set to

Histogram

, the statistical data results also include the

parameter XScale.

Histogram Analysis

167

Figure 13.3 Histogram Analysis Results

• Sum: indicates the sum of all bins (buckets) in the histogram.

• Peaks: indicates the maximum number of hits in any single bin.

• Max: indicates the maximum value.

• Min: indicates the minimum value.

• Pk_Pk: indicates the Delta (Max-Min) between the max. value and the min. value.

• Mean: indicates the average value of the histogram.

• Median: indicates the median value of the histogram.

• Mode: indicates the mode value of the histogram.

• Bin width: indicates the width of each bin (bucket) in the histogram.

• Sigma: indicates the standard deviation of the histogram.

• XScale: indicates the horizontal scale of the histogram. It is 100 times the value

of Bin width.

Histogram Analysis

DHO900 User Guide

168

13.7 To Remove Results

• Click or tap the "Histogram" label in the Result sidebar and a window is

displayed. Click or tap

Remove in the window to remove measurement results

and disable the histogram function.

• In the "Result" bar at the right side of the screen, drag the "Histogram" label to

the right to quickly remove results and disable the histogram function.

13.8 To Clear Statistics

Click or tap the "Histogram" label in the Result sidebar and a window is displayed.

Click or tap

Clear in the window to clear all statistical data and restart to make

statistics.

Histogram Analysis

169

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for

DHO914S and DHO924S only)

The DHO914S and DHO924S series have a standard built-in 25 MHz Function/

Arbitrary Waveform Generator (AFG), which integrates the signal source and the

oscilloscope into one, providing great convenience for engineers who need to use the

signal source and oscilloscope at the same time. This chapter introduces how to use

the built-in AFG.

14.1 To Output Basic Waveforms

Press the front-panel key or click or tap the AFG label at the bottom of the

screen to enable the AFG output. Press the

key or click or tap the AFG label

again to enter the AFG setting menu, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 14.1 AFG Setting Menu

The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator can output a variety of basic

waveforms, including Sine, Square, Ramp, DC, Noise, and Arb. You can set the basic

waveform parameters according to the following section and then click or tap the

Output on/off switch to enable/disable the output of the [AFG OUT] connector on

the rear panel.

14.1.1 To Output Sine

In the AFG setting menu as shown in

Figure 14.1

, click or tap the Function drop-

down button to select "Sine". At this time, you can set the parameters for the sine

waveform.

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for

DHO914S and DHO924S only)

DHO900 User Guide

170

Set the Frequency

Click or tap the

Frequency input field to set the frequency with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

Different waveforms have different frequency ranges.

Sine: 2 mHz to 25 MHz

Square: 2 mHz to 15 MHz

Ramp: 2 mHz to 150 kHz

Arb: 2 mHz to 10 MHz

Set the Amplitude

Click or tap the

Amplitude input field to set the amplitude with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The

amplitude range is related to the waveform frequency setting:

• Basic waveform frequency ≤10 MHz: 2 mV to 10 V

• Basic waveform frequency >10 MHz: 2 mV to 5 V

Set the Offset

Click or tap the

Offset input field to set the offset with the pop-up numeric keypad.

You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The offset

range is related to the amplitude value.

Set the Stating Phase

Click or tap the

Phase input field to set the starting phase with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its

available range is from 0° to 360°.

14.1.2 To Output Square

In the AFG setting menu as shown in

Figure 14.1

, click or tap the Function drop-

down button to select "Square". At this time, you can set the parameters for the

square waveform. For how to set the frequency, phase, amplitude, and offset, refer to

descriptions in

To Output Sine

. This section only illustrates how to set the duty cycle

for the square waveform.

Square duty cycle is the percentage of time that the square wave is at a high level

over the period of the square wave, as shown in the figure below. The parameter is

valid only when the square wave is selected.

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for

DHO914S and DHO924S only)

171

Duty Cycle=t/T*100%

Click or tap the Duty input field to set the duty cycle with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its

range is from 1% to 99%, and the default is 50%.

14.1.3 To Output Ramp

In the AFG setting menu as shown in

Figure 14.1

, click or tap the Function drop-

down button to select "Ramp". At this time, you can set the parameters for the ramp

waveforms. For how to set the frequency, phase, amplitude, and offset, refer to

descriptions in

To Output Sine

. This section only illustrates how to set the symmetry.

Symmetry is defined as the percentage of the amount of time ramp wave is rising in

the whole period, as shown in the figure below. The parameter is valid only when

ramp is selected.

Symmetry=t/T*100%

Click or tap the Symm input field to set the symmetry with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its

range is from 0% to 100%, and the default is 50%.

14.1.4 To Output Noise

In the AFG setting menu as shown in

Figure 14.1

, click or tap the Function drop-

down button to select "Noise". At this time, you can set the amplitude and offset for

noise.

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for

DHO914S and DHO924S only)

DHO900 User Guide

172

Set the Amplitude

Click or tap the

Amplitude input field to set the amplitude with the pop-up numeric

keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its

range is from 2 mV to 10 V.

Set the Offset

Click or tap the

Offset input field to set the offset with the pop-up numeric keypad.

You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The offset

range is related to the amplitude value.

14.1.5 To Output DC

In the AFG setting menu as shown in

Figure 14.1

, click or tap the Function drop-

down button to select "DC". At this time, you can set the offset for DC.

Click or tap the

Offset input field to set the offset with the pop-up numeric keypad.

You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is

from -5 V to 5 V.

14.1.6 To Output the Arbitrary Waveform

In the AFG setting menu as shown in

Figure 14.1

, click or tap the Function drop-

down button to select "Arb". At this time, you can load the arbitrary waveform and

set the parameters. For how to set the frequency, phase, amplitude, and offset, refer

to descriptions in

To Output Sine

. This section only illustrates how to load the

arbitrary waveform.

Click or tap the input field of

Arb Path, and then the disk management interface is

displayed. In the disk management interface, select the waveform from the internal

memory or the external memory. The waveform file is suffixed with "*.arb". Then click

or tap

OK to load the selected waveform. For details, refer to

Store and Load

14.2 Modulation

The built-in Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator of DHO914S and DHO924S

supports amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and phase

modulation (PM). A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a

modulating waveform. The carrier waveform is the basic waveform output from the

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator, and the modulating waveform can be the

built-in waveform.

In the AFG setting menu, click or tap the

Modulation tab to enter the Modulation

setting menu, as shown in the figure below. In this menu, you can select the

modulation type, set the modulating waveform parameters, and enable/disable the

modulation function. To set the carrier waveform (basic waveform), refer to

To Output

Basic Waveforms

. This section only illustrates the modulation setting.

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for

DHO914S and DHO924S only)

173

Figure 14.2 Modulation Interface

TIP

Supported carrier types include sine, square, and ramp. When the selected carrier waveform is

not supported, the modulation function is not available. You need to select an available carrier

waveform in the "Basic waves" menu.

14.2.1 AM

Amplitude Modulation (AM), namely the amplitude of the carrier waveform changes

with the amplitude of the modulating waveform.

Select the Modulation Type

Click or tap the

Modulation Type drop-down button to select "AM".

Select the Modulating Waveform

The instrument uses built-in signals for modulation. Click or tap the

Shape drop-

down button to select the modulating waveform. Available waveforms include:

• Sine

• Square with 50% duty cycle

• Triangle with 50% symmetry

• UpRamp with 100% symmetry

• DnRamp with 0% symmetry

• White gaussian noise

Set the Modulation Depth

Modulation depth is a percentage that represents the amplitude variation. Click or tap

the

Depth input field to set the modulation depth with the pop-up numeric keypad.

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for

DHO914S and DHO924S only)

DHO900 User Guide

174

You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. AM depth

ranges from 0% to 120%, and the default is 100%.

• At 0% depth, the amplitude is one-half of the carrier's amplitude setting.

• At 100% depth, the amplitude is identical to the carrier's amplitude setting.

• At greater than 100% depth, the instrument will not exceed 10 Vpp on the

output.

Set the Modulation Frequency

When the selected modulating waveform is not noise, you can set the modulation

frequency. Click or tap the

Mod Freq input field to set the modulation frequency with

the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob

to set the value. Its range is from 2 mHz to 1 MHz.

To Enable the Modulation Output

Click or tap

Modulation on/off switch to enable the modulation function. In the

"Basic waves" setting menu, click or tap the

Output on/off switch to enable the

waveform output. The instrument will output the modulated waveform via the rear-

panel [AFG OUT] connector according to the settings.

14.2.2 FM

Frequency Modulation (FM), namely the frequency of the carrier waveform changes

with the voltage of the modulating waveform.

Select the Modulation Type

Click or tap the

Modulation Type drop-down button to select "FM".

Select the Modulating Waveform

The instrument uses built-in signals for modulation. Click or tap the

Shape drop-

down button to select the modulating waveform. Available waveforms include:

• Sine

• Square with 50% duty cycle

• Triangle with 50% symmetry

• UpRamp with 100% symmetry

• DnRamp with 0% symmetry

• White gaussian noise

Set the Frequency Deviation

Frequency deviation represents the peak variation in frequency of the modulated

waveform from the carrier frequency. Click or tap the

Deviation input field to set the

frequency deviation with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for

DHO914S and DHO924S only)

175

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is from 2 mHz to the

current carrier frequency.

TIP

The frequency deviation plus the carrier frequency must be less than or equal to the selected

carrier's maximum frequency.

Set the Modulation Frequency

When the selected modulating waveform is not noise, you can set the modulation

frequency. Click or tap the

Mod Freq input field to set the modulation frequency with

the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob

to set the value. Its range is from 2 mHz to 1 MHz.

To Enable the Modulation Output

Click or tap

Modulation on/off switch to enable the modulation function. In the

"Basic waves" setting menu, click or tap the

Output on/off switch to enable the

waveform output. The instrument will output the modulated waveform via the rear-

panel [AFG OUT] connector according to the settings.

14.2.3 PM

Phase Modulation (PM), namely the phase of the carrier waveform changes with the

voltage of the modulating waveform.

Select the Modulation Type

Click or tap the

Modulation Type drop-down button to select "PM".

Select the Modulating Waveform

The instrument uses built-in signals for modulation. Click or tap the

Shape drop-

down button to select the modulating waveform. Available waveforms include:

• Sine

• Square with 50% duty cycle

• Triangle with 50% symmetry

• UpRamp with 100% symmetry

• DnRamp with 0% symmetry

• White gaussian noise

Set the Phase Deviation

Phase deviation represents the peak variation in phase of the modulated waveform

from the carrier waveform. Click or tap the

Phase Dev input field to set the phase

deviation with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. Its available range is from 0° to 360°, and the

default is 90°.

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for

DHO914S and DHO924S only)

DHO900 User Guide

176

Set the Modulation Frequency

When the selected modulating waveform is not noise, you can set the modulation

frequency. Click or tap the

Mod Freq input field to set the modulation frequency with

the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob

to set the value. Its range is from 2 mHz to 1 MHz.

To Enable the Modulation Output

Click or tap

Modulation on/off switch to enable the modulation function. In the

"Basic waves" setting menu, click or tap the

Output on/off switch to enable the

waveform output. The instrument will output the modulated waveform via the rear-

panel [AFG OUT] connector according to the settings.

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (for

DHO914S and DHO924S only)

177

Bode Plot (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

Bode plot is a way of graphically displaying the frequency response of a system. In

the switch power supply and operational amplifier's circuit feedback network, the

Bode plot provides the curves displaying the variation of gain and phase with the

frequency for a loop analysis. Through the analysis on the system's gain and phase

margins, you can determine the stability of the system.

With the built-in signal generator module, the DHO914S and DHO924S series

generate the sweep signal of a specified frequency range and outputs to the switch

power supply circuit under test. Then, the oscilloscope draws a Bode plot displaying

the variation of phase and gain with different frequencies. Click or tap the function

navigation icon

and select Bode Plots to enter the "Bode Plots" setting menu.

Figure 15.1 "Bode Plots" Setting Menu

Click or tap

to minimize the "Bode Plots" menu to simplify the display, as

shown in the figure below.

Figure 15.2 "Bode Plots" Setting Menu-Simplified Mode

Bode Plot (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

DHO900 User Guide

178

NOTE

The bode plot function can only test the response of basic devices such as amplifiers, but

cannot test circuits with greater noise.

15.1 Basic Setting

In the menu as shown in

Figure 15.1

, click or tap the Basic Setting tab to enter the

basic setting menu. In this menu, you can enable or disable the Bode plot function,

start or stop the Bode plot operation, set the input/output source, set the sweep type

and display type, enable the filter, and check the connection diagram.

15.1.1 To Enable or Disable the Bode Function

In the "Bode Plots" setting menu, click or tap the Bode Plots on/off switch to enable

or disable the Bode function. After the Bode function is enabled, the Bode plot

window will be displayed on the screen. For the bode plot display interface, refer to

To Set the Display Type

15.1.2 To Start or Stop the Operation

After the Bode function is enabled, in the setting menu, click or tap the

button of Run Status to launch or stop the loop analysis test and bode plot drawing

operation. The oscilloscope will perform a test on the loop based on the current bode

setting and draw the Bode plot. In running status, the button of

Run Status is

displayed as

. After the Bode plot drawing is finished, the Run Status

button restores to

During the Bode plot drawing process, if you want to stop the drawing, you can click

or tap

NOTE

Enabling the bode plot test automatically disables the bode plot setting menu. You can click or

tap

at the upper-right side to open the setting menu.

15.1.3 To Set the Input Source

The input source indicates the channel input with the reference signal. The current

frequency takes the frequency of this channel as the reference. Before selecting the

input source, connect the signal under test to the analog channel input terminal of

the oscilloscope.

Click or tap the

In drop-down button to select the desired input source. The available

input channels include CH1-CH4.

Bode Plot (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

179

15.1.4 To Set the Output Source

The output source indicates the channel that connects the feedback output signal.

Before selecting the output source, connect the signal under test to the analog

channel output terminal of the oscilloscope.

Click or tap the

Out drop-down button to select the desired output source. The

available output channels include CH1-CH4.

15.1.5 To Set the Sweep Type

Click or tap the Sweep Type drop-down button to select “Log” or “Line”.

• Line: the frequency of the swept sine wave varies linearly with the time.

• Log: the frequency of the swept sine wave varies logarithmically with the time.

15.1.6 To Enable or Disable the Filter

Click or tap the FIR Setup on/off switch to enable or disable the digital filter.

15.1.7 To Set the Display Type

Click or tap the Display Type drop-down button to select "Wave" or "Chart".

Waveform Display

The bode plot waveform display is as shown in the figure below. The X-axis value in

the bode plot represents the frequency and the Y-axis value represents the gain (red)

and phase (green). The magnitude-frequency curve (red) represents the gain between

system input and output. The phase-frequency curve (green) represents the phase

shift between system input and output.

Figure 15.3 Bode Plot Waveform Display

Bode Plot (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

DHO900 User Guide

180

1. Cursor: rotate the multipurpose knob 1 to move the cursor. The cursor information

is display at the upper-light corner of the display.

2. Bode plot curves: magnitude-frequency curve (red) and phase-frequency curve

(green).

3. Cursor information display:

- Freq: X-axis value of the cursor.

- Gain: Y-axis value of the crossover point between the cursor and the red

magnitude-frequency curve.

- Phase: Y-axis value of the crossover point between the cursor and the green

phase-frequency curve.

4. Margin result (displayed when the bode plot operation stops):

- PM: phase margin. It is the difference in phase between the phase at 0 dB gain

frequency point and 0-degree phase.

- GM: gain margin. It is the gain measurement difference between the value at 0

dB and the frequency point at 0-degree phase. That is, GM = 0 dB - Gain

Measurement Value.

5. Operation button: click or tap

to open the bode plot setting menu. Click or

tap

to disable the bode plot waveform display and disable the Bode function.

Chart Display

The chart form of the bode plots is as shown in the figure below. It shows the

frequency, gain, and phase of all sample points. Click or tap

to open the bode

plot setting menu. Click or tap

to close the chart and disable the Bode function.

Bode Plot (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

181

Figure 15.4 Bode Plot Chart Display

15.1.8 Connection Diagram

Before enabling the Bode function, make a proper loop connection. Click or tap Tips

to view the circuit connection diagram in the pop-up window. See the connection

diagram. Connect the rear-panel [AFG OUT] interface to the isolation transformer.

Inject the output signal of the isolation transformer to the injection resistor of the

circuit under test. Then measure the signals at the injection point and the output

point.

15.2 Cursor

The cursor is displayed as a white vertical line (as shown in

Figure 15.3

) in the bode

plot. Its X-axis value (Freq), Y-axis value of the crossover point between the cursor

and the magnitude-frequency curve (Gain), Y-axis value of the crossover point

between the cursor, and the phase-frequency curve (Phase) are displayed at the

upper-left corner of the interface. You can rotate the multipurpose knob 1 to adjust

the cursor position to view the information of each point.

Bode Plot (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

DHO900 User Guide

182

15.3 Amp/Freq Setting

In the setting menu as shown in

Figure 15.1

, click or tap the Amplitude and

Frequency Setting tab to enter the Amplitude and Frequency Setting menu. You can

set the following parameters.

• Start Frequency: click or tap the

Start Freq input field to set the start frequency

of the sine wave with the pop-up keypad. You can also use the multipurpose

knob to set the value. The setting range is from 10 Hz to 24.99 MHz.

• Stop Frequency: click or tap the Stop Freq input field to set the stop frequency

of the sine wave with the pop-up keypad. You can also use the multipurpose

knob to set the value. The setting range is from 100 Hz to 25 MHz.

• Points/decade: click or tap the Points input field to set the number of displayed

points per decade. You can also use the multipurpose knob to set the value. The

setting range is from 10 to 300. By default, it is 10.

• Amplitude: click or tap the Amp input field to set the voltage amplitude of sine

wave when the

Var.Amp. is set to "OFF".

• Variable Amplitude: click or tap the

Var.Amp. on/off switch to turn on or off the

variable amplitude function. When it is on, you can set the voltage amplitude of

sine wave in different frequency ranges.

TIP

The "Stop Freq" must be greater than the "Start Freq".

15.4 Store and Load

In the setting menu as shown in

Figure 15.1

, click or tap the Saving tab to enter the

bode plot saving menu. In this menu, you can save and load the bode plot data.

Save the Test Data

1. Click or tap the

Format drop-down button to select the format of the saved Bode

plot. Available file types include "*.csv" and "*.html".

2. Click or tap the

File Name input field to set the filename with the pop-up virtual

keypad.

3. Click or tap the

File Path input field and the "Disk" menu is displayed. Select the

desired target path and then click or tap

OK to set the path. For details about the

Disk menu, refer to

Disk Management

4. Click or tap

save to save the Bode plot file according to the settings.

Bode Plot (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

183

Load the Test Data

1. The File Type item displays the file type that can be loaded. It is specified as *.csv.

2. Click or tap the File Path input field and the "Disk" menu is displayed. Select the

desired target file and then click or tap

OK to select the file. For details about the

Disk menu, refer to

Disk Management

3. Click or tap

Load to load the file. The saved test data will be displayed on the

screen in a wave/chart format (depending on the display type setting).

Bode Plot (for DHO914S and DHO924S only)

DHO900 User Guide

184

Reference Waveform

This series oscilloscope provides 10 reference waveform positions (Ref1-Ref10). In the

actual test process, you can compare the signal waveform with the reference

waveform to locate the failure.

16.1 To Enable Ref Function

You can access the Ref menu in the following ways.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select

Ref to enter the reference waveform function menu.

• Press the front-panel

key to enter the reference waveform function menu.

Figure 16.1 Reference Waveform Menu

When the Ref function is enabled, you can select different colors for reference

waveforms, set the source of each reference channel, adjust the vertical scale and

offset of the reference waveform, save the reference waveform to the internal or

external memory, and recall it when necessary.

16.2 To Set the Reference Waveform

In the Ref menu, you can specify a channel to serve as the reference channel. You can

save or clear the reference channel.

Select the Reference Channel

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Current to select the reference waveform

channel (Ref1-Ref10). By default, Ref1 is enabled.

Reference Waveform

185

Select the Ref Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Source to select the desired reference

waveform source (CH1-CH4, D0-D15, or Math1-Math4).

Save the Reference Waveform to Internal Memory

Click or tap

SaveToRef to save the displayed waveform for the specified source to the

internal memory as the reference waveform.

CAUTION

This operation only saves the reference waveform to the volatile memory, and the

waveform will be cleared at power-off or restored to the default settings. If you want to

store reference waveforms that can be recalled when necessary, please export the

waveform to internal or external memory (

Export to Internal or External Memory

)

Clear the Specified Reference Waveform

Click or tap

Clear to clear the specified reference waveform for the "current

channel".

You can also click or tap the

Clear button in the function navigation menu or press

the front-panel

key to clear the reference waveforms of all the reference

channels.

16.3 To Set the Ref Waveform Display

After clicking or tapping SaveToRef, you can adjust the vertical scale and offset of the

reference waveform specified in

Current.

Modify the Vertical Scale

Click or tap the input field of

VScale, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the vertical scale of the reference waveform. You can directly click or tap the icons

at the right side of the input field of VScale to increase or decrease the vertical

scale value. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to adjust the

scale.

Modify the Vertical Offset

Click or tap the input field of

VOffset, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the vertical offset of the reference waveform. You can directly click or tap the Up

and Down arrow icons

at the right side of the input field of VOffset to

Reference Waveform

DHO900 User Guide

186

increase or decrease the vertical offset value. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to adjust the offset.

Restore the Reference Waveform

If you have adjusted the vertical scale and offset for the specified reference waveform

of the current channel, to reset the reference waveform to the position where the

source channel stays prior to the

SaveToRef operation, click or tap Reset.

Set the Reference Waveform Color

This series oscilloscope provides five colors (gray, green, light blue, red, and orange)

to mark the reference waveforms of different channels in order to distinguish them.

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Color to select the color of the reference

waveform of the channel.

Set the Reference Waveform Label

Click or tap the

Label on/off switch to enable or disable the label display of the

specified reference waveform.

Click or tap the input field of

Label to set the label of the specified reference channel

with the pop-up numeric keypad.

16.4 Export and Import Operation

Export to Internal or External Memory

You can save the current reference waveform to the internal memory or external USB

storage device. The file format of the reference waveform is "*.ref", "*.bin", or "*.csv".

Click or tap Export to enter the reference waveform file saving interface.

• Set the Format

In the file saving interface, click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select

"*.ref", "*.bin", or "*.csv" as the saving format.

• Set the Filename

Click or tap the input field of

File Name to set the filename with the pop-up

virtual keypad.

For how to use the keypad, refer to descriptions in

Parameter Setting Method

• Set the Save Path

Click or tap the

File Path input field, then the disk management menu is

displayed. Through the disk management menu, you can save the current

Reference Waveform

187

reference waveform to the internal memory or external USB storage device. Then

click or tap

Save to complete the save operation. For details about the disk

management operation, refer to the

Disk Management

section in

Store and

Load

TIP

• Only when the reference waveform is saved, can this export function be valid.

• For the ".bin" format file, refer to

Binary Data Format (.bin)

Import from Internal or External Memory

You can import the stored reference waveform file from the internal memory or

external USB storage device to the instrument and display the file on the screen.

Click or tap

Import to enter the reference waveform file loading interface.

• Set the Format

The file format of the reference waveform is specified as "*.ref" which is

displayed in

Format.

• Set the Load Path

Click or tap the input field of

File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed.

Through the disk management menu, you can load the current reference

waveform to the waveform view of the oscilloscope. Then click or tap

Load to

complete the load operation. For details about the disk management operation,

refer to the

Disk Management

section in

Store and Load

Reference Waveform

DHO900 User Guide

188

Pass/Fail Test

During the product design and manufacturing process, you usually need to monitor

the variations of the signal or judge whether the product is up to standard. DHO900

series oscilloscope can accomplish this task perfectly with its standard pass/fail test

function. You can use this function to define the mask based on "standard"

waveforms. It compares the signal under test with the mask and displays the test

results. When the pass/fail status is detected, you can choose to stop monitoring,

sound an alarm with the beeper, or save the current screen image.

Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen to

open the function navigation. Then click or tap the

Pass/Fail button to enter the

"PassFail" setting menu. You can also press the front-panel

key and select Pass/

Fail to enter the "PassFail" setting menu. The menu is as shown in the figure below.

Figure 17.1 PassFail Menu

Click or tap

to minimize the "PassFail" menu to simplify the display, as shown in

the figure below.

Figure 17.2 PassFail Menu-Simplified

Pass/Fail Test

189

17.1 To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function

In the "Pass/Fail" setting menu, click or tap the Enable on/off switch to enable or

disable the pass/fail test function.

You can select the source, create mask, and set test result output only after the pass/

fail test function is enabled.

17.2 To Select the Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired source. The

available output channels include CH1-CH4.

TIP

When a disabled channel is selected as the source, it will be automatically turned on.

17.3 To Create a Mask

In the Pass/Fail menu, you can self-define the mask of the pass/fail test. The mask can

be imported or exported.

Create a Mask

Click or tap

X Mask and Y Mask input fields respectively to set the horizontal

tolerance range and vertical tolerance range with the pop-up numeric keypad. You

can also use the icons at the right side of the input fields or use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the values. Then click or tap

Create to apply the currently

created mask (the region not covered by blue within the screen).

Save the Mask

When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can save the current test mask range

to the internal memory or an external USB storage device (when detected) in "*.pf"

format.

Click or tap Save to enter the file saving interface. Click or tap the input field of File

Name and File Path to input the filename and select the desired file path to save the

test mask file to the internal or external memory. For details, refer to the

Disk

Management

section in

Store and Load

Load a Mask

When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can load the test mask files from the

internal memory or an external USB storage device (when detected) and apply them

to the current pass/fail test function.

Pass/Fail Test

DHO900 User Guide

190

Click or tap Load to enter the file loading interface. Click or tap the input field of File

Path to load the specified test mask files (in *.pf format) and apply them to the

current pass/fail test function. For details, refer to the

Disk Management

section in

Store and Load

17.4 To Set the Output Form of the Test Results

In Option, you can set what the oscilloscope will execute when test results are

detected according to your needs.

Set the output event and Aux output

• Click or tap the

Aux Output on/off switch to enable or disable the Aux output.

When enabled, in the

Utility menu, the sub-menu AUX Out of Setup is

automatically set to "PassFail". When a successful or failed event is detected, a

pulse will be output from the rear-panel [AUX OUT] connector. When disabled,

the sub-menu

AUX Out of Setup in the Utility menu is automatically set to

"TrigOut", and the output of the [AUX OUT] connector is irrelevant with the

pass/fail test.

• Select "Pass" or "Fail" in Output Event. When a "pass" or "fail" event is detected,

a pulse will be output from the rear-panel [AUX OUT] connector.

Set the output polarity and output pulse width

Select "Positive" or "Negative" in

Polarity, then click or tap the input field of Pulse to

set the pulse width with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also use the

corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. Its range is from 100 ns to 10 ms.

By default, it is 1 μs.

Set the error action

Err Action, select one operation that the oscilloscope will execute once a pass/fail

test is detected.

• Stop: stop sampling when a failed event is found.

• Beeper: the beeper sounds an alarm when a failed event is found (irrelevant with

the on/off status of the beeper).

• Screenshot: perform the screenshot operation when a failed event is found. If an

external storage device is detected, the screenshot will be saved to the external

storage device directly. Otherwise, it will be saved to the local disk.

If "Screenshot" is selected, "Stop" action will be executed forcibly. The sampling

stops automatically. After the screenshot operation is completed, the sampling

will continue.

Pass/Fail Test

191

17.5 To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation

After the Pass/Fail test function is enabled, click or tap the Operate button

to start the test operation or to stop the operation.

During the test process, the oscilloscope will test the waveforms, display the test

information, and output the test information based on the current settings. The

"Pass/Fail" result will be displayed in the "Result" bar at the right side of the screen,

as shown in the figure below.

Blue Area: Mask

Pass/Fail Result Display

Signal under Test

The test fails once the

waveform reaches the

mask area.

Figure 17.3 Pass/Fail Test Interface

TIP

• Only when the pass/fail test function is enabled, can you start or stop the pass/fail test

operation, save and load the mask range.

• After starting the test operation, you can neither modify the source channel nor adjust

the test mask.

17.6 To Display the Statistics of the Test Results

After the "Pass/Fail" function is enabled, the test results will be displayed in the

"Result" bar at the right side of the screen. You can click or tap the icon

at the

lower-right corner of the screen to hide the "Result" sidebar.

The test results statistics include the number of failed frames, the number of

successful frames, and total number of frames, as shown in the figure below.

Failed Frames

Passed Frames

Total Frames

Pass/Fail Test

DHO900 User Guide

192

Click or tap the "Pass/Fail" label and a window is displayed for you to perform the

following operations.

• Click or tap

Reset Stat., and then the statistics in the "Pass/Fail" label will be

reset to 0.

• Click or tap

Setting, and then the PassFail setting menu is displayed.

• Click or tap Remove, and then the pass/fail function is disabled.

Pass/Fail Test

193

Protocol Decoding

You can use the protocol analysis to discover errors, debug hardware, and accelerate

development easily, ensuring you to accomplish the projects with high speed and

good quality. Protocol decoding is the basis of protocol analysis. Only protocol

analyses with correct protocol decoding are acceptable, and only correct protocol

decoding can identify more error information. This oscilloscope provides four bus

decoding modules (Decode 1, Decode 2, Decode 3, and Decode 4) to make common

protocol decoding for the input signals of the analog channels. It provides standard

serial decodes including Parallel, RS232/UART, I2C, SPI, CAN, and LIN. As the

decoding functions and setting methods of Decode1, Decode2, Decode3, and

Decode4 are the same, this chapter takes Decode1 as an example for illustration.

• Click or tap > Decode to enter the "Decode" menu.

• Click or tap the Decode button on the toolbar to enter the "Decode" menu.

18.1 Parallel Decoding

Parallel bus consists of clock line and data line. As shown in the figure below, CLK is

the clock line, whereas Bit0 and Bit1 are the 0 bit and 1st bit on the data line

respectively. The oscilloscope will sample the channel data on the rising edge, falling

edge, or the rising/falling edge of the clock and judge each data point (logic "1" or

logic "0") according to the preset threshold level.

CLK

Bit0

Bit1

Parallel[BIN] 11 10

10 00

Figure 18.1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding

In the

Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select

Parallel, then configure the parameters for Parallel decoding.

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

194

Figure 18.2 Parallel Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the

Bus Status on/off switch to enable or disable the bus decoding.

18.1.1 Clock Setting (CLK)

Clock Setting (CLK)

Click or tap the drop-down button of

CLK to select from analog channels CH1-CH4 or

digital channels D0-D15 (available only when the digital channel probe is connected).

If "OFF" is selected, no clock channel is set, and sampling is performed when a hop

occurs to the data of the data channel during decoding.

Threshold

You need to set a threshold when the clock signal is an analog channel (CH1-CH4).

Click or tap the input field of Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the threshold. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the

value. The range of the threshold is related to the current vertical scale and offset.

CLK Edge

You can select "Rising", "Falling", or "Both" in

CLK Edge when the clock channel is

set to an analog channel (CH1-CH4).

• Rising: samples the channel data on the rising edge of the clock.

• Falling: samples the channel data on the falling edge of the clock.

• Both: samples the channel data on the rising edge or the falling edge of the

clock.

Protocol Decoding

195

18.1.2 Bus Setting

Set the Bus

Click or tap the drop-down button of

BUS to select the desired bus. Available options

include analog channels CH1-CH4 or digital channels D0-D15. You can also self-

define the bus. Only when the digital channel probe is connected, can you select the

digital channel (D0-D15) as the bus.

Table 18.1 Bus Setting

Bus Width Bit X Channel Remarks

CH1 1 0 CH1

Width, Bit X, and CH are set

automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

CH2 1 0 CH2

Width, Bit X, and CH are set

automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

CH3 1 0 CH3

Width, Bit X, and CH are set

automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

CH4 1 0 CH4

Width, Bit X, and CH are set

automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

D7-D0 8 0 (Default) D7 (Default)

Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D7 to

D0 respectively. Width is set

automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

D15-D8 8 0 (Default)

D15

(Default)

Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D15

to D8 respectively. Width is

set automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

D15-D0 16 0 (Default)

D15

(Default)

Bit0 to Bit15 are set to D15

to D0 respectively. Width is

set automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

D0-D7 8 0 (Default) D0 (Default)

Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D0 to

D7 respectively. Width is set

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

196

Bus Width Bit X Channel Remarks

automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

D8-D15 8 0 (Default) D8 (Default)

Bit0 to Bit7 are set to D8 to

D15 respectively. Width is

set automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

D0-D15 16 0 (Default) D0 (Default)

Bit0 to Bit15 are set to D0

to D15 respectively. Width

is set automatically, and

you cannot modify them.

User

1 (Default)

to 4

0 (Default) - -

Set the Width

When the "BUS" setting is set to "User", you can set the bus width. Click or tap the

input field of

Width, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the width. You

can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

Specify data channel for each bit

When the "BUS" setting is set to "User", you can specify the data channel for each bit.

Click or tap

Bit X set the bit of the channel. By default, 0 is selected. Its available

range is from 0 to (width - 1).

Click or tap the drop-down button of

CH to select the data channels for a bit.

Available sources include analog channels CH1-CH4 or digital channels D0-D15. Only

when the digital channel probe is connected, can you select the digital channel (D0-

D15) as the data channel for the specified bit.

Set the Threshold Level

To judge logic "1" and logic "0" of the buses, you need to set a threshold for each

analog channel (CH1-CH4). When the channel signal amplitude is greater than the

preset threshold, it is judged as logic "1"; otherwise logic "0".

Click or tap the input field of

Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the threshold. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the

value. The range of the threshold is related to the current vertical scale and offset.

Protocol Decoding

197

Set the endian

Endian, select "Invert" or "Normal" as the endian of the bus.

Set the polarity

Polarity, select "Positive" or "Negative" as the data polarity.

18.1.3 Display-related Settings

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select the display format of the bus

data and event table. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the

Label on/off switch to enable or disable the label display of the

decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left side of

the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus type.

18.1.4 Event Table

The event table displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding

information in time order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively

longer decoded data. The decoding information includes the decoded data, the

corresponding line number, and time information.

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the

Event Table on/off switch to enable or disable the display of the

event table. When enabled, the event table is displayed as shown in the figure below.

You can also click or tap the icon

at the upper-right corner of the table to close

the event table.

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

198

Decode Time

Decoded Data

Parallel Bus

Line No.

Figure 18.3 Parallel Decoding Event Table

TIP

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Export

When the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state, you can export the time and its

corresponding decoded data in the event table.

In Decode menu, click or tap

Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You

can export the data to the internal memory or the external USB storage device (only

when detected) in *.csv format. For details, refer to

Store and Load

18.2 RS232 Decoding

RS232 serial bus consists of the transmitting data line (TX) and the receiving data line

(RX).

Figure 18.4 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus

Protocol Decoding

199

In RS232, baud rate is used to represent the transmission rate (namely bits per

second) of the data. You need to set the start bit, data bits, check bit (optional), and

stop bits for each frame of data.

• Start Bit: indicates when to output data.

• Data Bit: indicates the number of data bits actually contained in each frame of

data.

• Check Bit: used to check whether the data are properly transmitted.

• Stop Bit: indicates when to stop outputting data.

In the

Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select RS232,

then configure the parameters for RS232 decoding.

Figure 18.5 RS232 Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the

Bus Status on/off switch to enable or disable the bus decoding.

Quickly Apply Trigger Settings to Decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap

Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

200

18.2.1 Source Setting

Set the Tx source and the threshold

Click or tap drop-down button of

Tx to select the desired source. The options include

CH1-CH4, D0-D15, and OFF. Only when the digital channel probe is connected, can

you select the digital channel (D0-D15) as the Tx source.

When the source is set to CH1-CH4, you can click or tap the input field of

Threshold,

and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold of Tx source. You can

also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value. The range of the

threshold is related to the current vertical scale and offset.

When you modify the threshold of the Tx source channel, a dotted line displaying the

current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you

stop modifying the threshold.

Set the Rx source and the threshold

Use the same method to select the

Rx source and set the threshold. The default state

Rx is OFF.

TIP

The sources of

Tx and Rx cannot be set to OFF at the same time.

Polarity

Click or tap "Positive" or "Negative" in

Polarity.

• Positive: High level is logic "1" and low level is logic "0".

• Negative: High level is logic "0" and low level is logic "1".

Set the baud rate

Click or tap the drop-down button of Baud to select the baud rate. The available

baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps, 150 bps, and etc.

The oscilloscope allows you to self-define the baud rate. Click or tap the drop-down

button of

Baud to select "User" and then set the baud rate with the pop-up numeric

keypad.

18.2.2 To Set Data Package

Data

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Data to select the data bits. The available data

bits are 5 bits, 6 bits, 7 bits, 8 bits, and 9 bits.

Protocol Decoding

201

Parity

It is used to check whether the data transmission is correct. Click or tap the drop-

down button of

Parity to select the desired parity mode.

• None: indicates that no check bit appears during the transmission.

• Even: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit is an

even number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "0" should be added

to the check bit.

• Odd: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit is an

odd number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "1" should be added to

the check bit.

Stop Bit

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Stop Bit to set the stop bits after each frame of

data. It can be set to 1 bit, 1.5 bits, or 2 bits.

Endian

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Endian to select the desired endian.

• LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.e. the lowest bit of

the data is transmitted first.

• MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.e. the highest bit of

the data is transmitted first.

bit0

bit1

bit2

bit3

bit4

bit5

bit6

bit7

bit6

bit5

bit4

bit3

bit2

bit1

bit0

LSB MSB

18.2.3 Display-related Settings

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select the display format of the bus

data and event table. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

202

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the

Label on/off switch to enable or disable the label display of the

decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left side of

the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus type.

18.2.4 Event Table

Click or tap the Event Table on/off switch to enable or disable the display of the

event table. When enabled, the event table is displayed as shown in the figure below.

You can also click or tap the icon

at the upper-right corner of the table to close

the event table.

Line No.

Time

Tx/Rx

Data

Error

RS232 Bus

Figure 18.6 RS232 Decoding Event Table

TIP

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Export

When the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state, you can export the time and its

corresponding decoded data in the event table.

In Decode menu, click or tap

Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You

can export the data to the internal memory or the external USB storage device (only

when detected) in *.csv format. For details, refer to

Store and Load

Protocol Decoding

203

18.3 I2C Decoding

I2C serial bus consists of the clock line (SCL) and the data line (SDA).

SCL: samples SDA on the rising or falling edge of the clock.

SDA: indicates the data channel.

SCL

SDA

Figure 18.7 I2C Serial Bus

In the

Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select I2C,

then configure the parameters for I2C decoding.

Figure 18.8 I2C Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the

Bus Status on/off switch to enable or disable the bus decoding.

Quickly Apply Trigger Settings to Decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap

Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

18.3.1 Source Setting

Set the clock channel source and the threshold

• Click or tap the drop-down button of CLK to select the desired source of the

clock channel. Available sources include analog channels CH1-CH4 or digital

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

204

channels D0-D15. D0-D15 are available only when the digital channel probe is

connected.

• Click or tap the input field of

SCL Thre and use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the threshold of the clock channel when an analog channel (CH1-CH4) is

selected as the source. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob

to set the value.

When you modify the threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the

current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after

you stop modifying the threshold.

Set the data channel source and the threshold

• Click or tap the drop-down button of

SDA to select the desired source of the

data channel. Available sources include analog channels CH1-CH4 or digital

channels D0-D15. D0-D15 are available only when the digital channel probe is

connected.

• Click or tap the input field of SDA Thre and use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the threshold of the data channel when an analog channel (CH1-CH4) is

selected as the source. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob

to set the value.

Exchange sources

Select "SCL/SDA" or "SDA/SCL" in

Exchange to exchange the sources of the current

clock channel and data channel.

Specify whether the address information includes the "R/W" bit

For I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information (read address and

write address).

Select "Without" or "With" in

R/W to decide whether the address information

includes the "R/W" bit. When "With" is selected, the "R/W" bit will be included in the

address information; when "Without" is selected, the "R/W" bit will not be included

in the address information.

18.3.2 Display-related Settings

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select the display format of the bus

data and event table. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".

Protocol Decoding

205

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the

Label on/off switch to enable or disable the label display of the

decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left side of

the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus type.

18.3.3 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the

Event Table on/off switch to enable or disable the display of the

event table. When enabled, the event table is displayed as shown in the figure below.

You can also click or tap the icon

at the upper-right corner of the table to close

the event table.

I2C Bus

Line No.

Time

R/W Bit

ACK

Decoded Data

Address

Figure 18.9 I2C Decoding Event Table

TIP

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Export

When the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state, you can export the time and its

corresponding decoded data in the event table.

In Decode menu, click or tap

Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You

can export the data to the internal memory or the external USB storage device (only

when detected) in *.csv format. For details, refer to

Store and Load

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

206

Address information in decoding

For I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information (read address and

write address). In the address information, "Read" indicates the read address

(

) and "Write" indicates the write address ( ). You can decide

whether to include or exclude the "R/W" bit for the address information.

Error expressions in decoding

In I2C decoding, the response includes ACK (acknowledgment) and NACK (non-

acknowledgment). When NACK is detected after "Write", red error report information

(

) is displayed.

18.4 SPI Decoding

SPI bus is based on the master — slave configuration and usually consists of chip

select line (CS), clock line (CLK), and data line (SDA). Wherein, the data lines include

the master input/slave output (MISO) data line and master output/slave input (MOSI)

data line. The oscilloscope samples the channel data on the rising or falling edge of

the clock signal and judge each data point (logic "1" or logic "0") according to the

preset threshold level.

Master

Slave

MOSI

CLK

MISO

CLK

SDA

(MISO/MOSI)

Figure 18.10 SPI Serial Bus

In the

Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select SPI,

then configure the parameters for SPI decoding.

Protocol Decoding

207

Figure 18.11 SPI Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the

Bus Status on/off switch to enable or disable the bus decoding.

Quickly Apply Trigger Settings to Decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap

Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

18.4.1 To Set the Source

Set the Clock Signal

• Click or tap the drop-down button of CLK to select the desired source of the

clock channel. Available sources include analog channels CH1-CH4 and digital

channels D0-D15. D0-D15 are available only when the digital channel probe is

connected.

• Click or tap the input field of

Threshold at the right side of CLK and use the

pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold of the clock channel when an

analog channel (CH1-CH4) is selected. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value.

• Click or tap "Rising" or "Falling" in

Slope to set the instrument to sample MISO

and MOSI on the CLK edge.

MISO and MOSI Setting

• Click or tap the drop-down button of

MISO to select the desired source.

Available sources include analog channels CH1-CH4, digital channels D0-D15,

and OFF. D0-D15 are available only when the digital channel probe is connected.

• When the MISO source is set to CH1-CH4, you can click or tap the input field of

Threshold at the right side of MISO, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

208

to set the threshold of the MISO channel. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value.

• Click or tap the drop-down button of

MOSI to select the desired source.

Available sources include analog channels CH1-CH4, digital channels D0-D15,

and OFF. D0-D15 are available only when the digital channel probe is connected.

• When the MOSI source is set to CH1-CH4, you can click or tap the input field of

Threshold at the right side of MOSI, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad

to set the threshold of the MOSI channel. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value.

TIP

The MISO and MOSI sources cannot be set to "OFF" at the same time.

18.4.2 To Set Mode and Data

Mode

Select "Timeout" or "CS" in

Mode.

• Timeout

You can perform frame synchronization according to the timeout, and the

timeout value must be greater than half of the clock cycle Click or tap the input

field of

Timeout, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the timeout

value. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

The adjustable range of the timeout value is from 8 ns to 10 s. By default, it is 1

μs.

• CS

It contains a chip select line (CS). You can perform frame synchronization

according to CS. When "CS" is selected,

- Click or tap the drop-down button of

CS to select the desired source. The

sources include analog channels CH1-CH4 and digital channels D0-D15

(available only when the digital channel probe is connected).

- Click or tap the input field of Threshold and use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the threshold when an analog channel (CH1-CH4) is selected

as the CS channel. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob

to set the value.

- In

CS Polarity, select "Positive" or "Negative".

Endian

Click or tap the drop-down button of Endian to select the desired endian.

Protocol Decoding

209

• LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.e. the lowest bit of

the data is transmitted first.

• MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.e. the highest bit of

the data is transmitted first.

bit0

bit1

bit2

bit3

bit4

bit5

bit6

bit7

bit6

bit5

bit4

bit3

bit2

bit1

bit0

LSB MSB

Polarity

Polarity, select "Positive" or "Negative" as the data polarity.

Width Setting

Click or tap the input field of

Width, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the length of the data. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value. The setting range is from 4 to 32. By default, it is 8.

18.4.3 Display-related Settings

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select the display format of the bus

data and event table. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the

Label on/off switch to enable or disable the label display of the

decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left side of

the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus type.

18.4.4 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the

Event Table on/off switch to enable or disable the display of the

event table. When enabled, the event table is displayed as shown in the figure below.

You can also click or tap the icon

at the upper-right corner of the table to close

the event table.

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

210

SPI Bus

Line No.

Time

MISO Decoded Data

MISO Error

Figure 18.12 SPI Decoding Event Table

TIP

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Export

When the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state, you can export the time and its

corresponding decoded data in the event table.

In Decode menu, click or tap

Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You

can export the data to the internal memory or the external USB storage device (only

when detected) in *.csv format. For details, refer to

Store and Load

18.5 LIN Decoding

The oscilloscope samples the LIN signal, and judges each data point to be logic "1" or

logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. The LIN decoding is required to

specify the LIN signal protocol version.

In the

Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select LIN,

then configure the parameters for LIN decoding.

Protocol Decoding

211

Figure 18.13 LIN Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the

Bus Status on/off switch to enable or disable the bus decoding.

Quickly Apply Trigger Settings to Decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap

Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

18.5.1 Signal Configuration

Set the source and the threshold

• Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired source.

Available sources include analog channels CH1-CH4 and digital channels D0-D15

(available only when the digital channel probe is connected).

• When the source is set to an analog channel, click or tap the input field of

Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold of the

source channel. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value.

When you modify the threshold of the signal source, a dotted line displaying the

current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after

you stop modifying the threshold.

Set the Signal

• Click or tap the drop-down button of

Baud Rate to select the baud rate. The

available baud rates include 2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 10.0 kbps, 19.2 kbps,

and etc. You can also self-define the baud rate.

• In Parity bit, click or tap "With" or "Without" to select whether the data

contain the parity bit.

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

212

• In Version, select the protocol version that matches the LIN bus signal. The

available versions include "1.X", "2.X", and "Both".

18.5.2 Display-related Settings

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select the display format of the bus

data and event table. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the

Label on/off switch to enable or disable the label display of the

decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left side of

the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus type.

18.5.3 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the

Event Table on/off switch to enable or disable the display of the

event table. When enabled, the event table is displayed as shown in the figure below.

You can also click or tap the icon

at the upper-right corner of the table to close

the event table.

LIN Bus

Line No. Time

Decoded Data

Frame ID

Checksum

Error

Figure 18.14 LIN Decoding Event Table

TIP

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Protocol Decoding

213

Export

When the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state, you can export the time and its

corresponding decoded data in the event table.

In Decode menu, click or tap Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You

can export the data to the internal memory or the external USB storage device (only

when detected) in *.csv format. For details, refer to

Store and Load

Interpret the Decoded LIN Data

• Break (Sync Break): expressed in Hex, identified as "Break:".

• SYNC (Sync): expressed in Hex, identified as "SYNC:".

• ID (Frame ID): expressed in Hex, identified as "ID:".

• Data (Data): Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin,

or ASCII), identified as "Data:".

• Checksum (check sum): expressed in Hex, identified as "Checksum:". When errors

occur, it is displayed as a red patch.

• Wakeup (wake up symbol): identified as "Wakeup:".

18.6 CAN Decoding

The oscilloscope samples the CAN signal at the specified sample position, and judges

each data point to be logic "1" or logic "0" according to the preset threshold level.

You need to specify the CAN signal type and sample position.

In the

Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select CAN,

then configure the parameters for CAN decoding.

Figure 18.15 CAN Decoding Menu

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

214

Bus Status

Click or tap the

Bus Status on/off switch to enable or disable the bus decoding.

Quickly Apply Trigger Settings to Decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap

Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

18.6.1 Signal Configuration

Set the source and the threshold

• Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired source.

Available sources include analog channels CH1-CH4 and digital channels D0-D15

(available only when the digital channel probe is connected).

• When the source is set to an analog channel, click or tap the input field of

Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold of the

source channel. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set

the value.

When you modify the threshold of the signal source, a dotted line displaying the

current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after

you stop modifying the threshold.

Select the Signal Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Signal to select a signal type that matches the

CAN bus signal. The available signal types include CAN_H, CAN_L, Rx, Tx, and Diff.

• CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.

• CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.

• Rx: indicates the Receive signal from the CAN bus transceiver.

• Tx: indicates the Transmit signal from the CAN bus transceiver.

• DIFF: The CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog source channel by

using a differential probe. Connect the probe's positive lead to the CAN_H bus

signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L bus signal.

Specify the Standard Signal Rate

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Baud to select the preset baud rate. The

available baud rates include 10.0 kbps, 19.2 kbps, 20.0 kbps, 33.3 kbps and etc. This

instrument also supports user-defined baud rate. Click or tap the

Baud drop-down

button to select "User" and set the baud rate with the pop-up numeric keypad.

Protocol Decoding

215

Sample Position

Sample position is a point within a bit's time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at

this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from the

start of the bit to the sample point" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure below.

One Bit

60%

70%

80%

Figure 18.16 Sample Position

Click or tap the Sample Position input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the value. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

The settable range is from 10% to 90%.

18.6.2 Display-related Settings

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select the display format of the bus

data and event table. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", and "ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the

Label on/off switch to enable or disable the label display of the

decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left side of

the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus type.

18.6.3 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the

Event Table on/off switch to enable or disable the display of the

event table. When enabled, the event table is displayed as shown in the figure below.

You can also click or tap the icon

at the upper-right corner of the table to close

the event table.

Protocol Decoding

DHO900 User Guide

216

Line No.

Time

Frame ID

DLC

Decoded Data CRC

ACK

CAN Bus

Figure 18.17 CAN Decoding Event Table

TIP

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Export

When the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state, you can export the time and its

corresponding decoded data in the event table.

In Decode menu, click or tap

Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You

can export the data to the internal memory or the external USB storage device (only

when detected) in *.csv format. For details, refer to

Store and Load

Interpret the Decoded CAN Data

• Frame ID: expressed in Hex, identified as "ID:".

• DLC (Data Length Code): expressed in Hex, identified as "DLC:".

• Data: Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or

ASCII), identified as "Data:".

• CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, identified as "CRC:".

• ACK (Acknowledgement): identified as "ACK". When errors (ACK is detected to

be 1) occur, displayed as a red patch.

• R (remote frame): identified as "R:".

• Stuff (Bit filling error): identified as "Stuff".

Protocol Decoding

217

Multi-pane Windowing

This series oscilloscope supports multi-pane windowing. You can add multiple

windows and result display windows for display and view.

Click or tap

> Windows to enter the "Add Window" menu. You can also click or

tap the

Windows button on the toolbar at the top of the screen to enter the menu, as

shown in the figure below.

Figure 19.1 "Add Window" Menu

Add Diagram Windows

1. First, select "XY" or "Math" in

Diagram. When a diagram is selected, its preview

and parameter setting items can be displayed at the upper part of the "Add

Window" menu.

2. You can set the corresponding parameters according to your needs. For details,

refer to descriptions of relevant chapters.

3. Click or tap Add and then the selected diagram is displayed on the screen.

Multi-pane Windowing

DHO900 User Guide

218

TIP

When the waveform view window is closed, the "Waveform View" item appears on the

Diagram menu. You can use the item to open the waveform view window.

Add Result Table Window

Click or tap "Measure", "All Measure", or "Decode" in

Result Table, and then click

or tap

Add. The corresponding measurement results will be displayed on the screen.

Multi-pane Windowing

219

Waveform Recording and Playing

Waveform recording/playing function can play the recorded waveforms, enabling you

to analyze the waveforms better.

You can enter the "Record" menu in the following ways.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

and then select Record to enter the

"Record" menu.

• Click or tap

Record on the toolbar to enter the "Record" menu.

• Press the front-panel

key and select Record in the pop-up "Analyse"

menu to enter the "Record" menu.

Figure 20.1 "Record" Menu

TIP

When the acquisition mode is set to

UltraAcquire

, the waveform recording/playing function is

not available. You can view waveform segments using

Navigate segments

20.1 Common Settings

Waveform Recording

Click or tap the

Record on/off switch to enable or disable the waveform recording

function. Before recording the waveform, you can refer to descriptions in

Record

Options

to set the waveform recording parameters.

Waveform Recording and Playing

DHO900 User Guide

220

• Click or tap the Record button to start recording the waveforms. Then the

record icon turns into

from .

• The data at the right side of the record progress bar indicate the current frame/

total frames. During recording, the current recording information is displayed on

the screen in real time with the current frames constantly changing.

• After the recording is completed,

turns into and recording stops

automatically.

• During recording, you can also click or tap

to suspend the recording

manually.

Currently Recorded Frames

Total Frames

Waveform Playing

Click or tap the play icon

in Play to start playing the recorded waveforms. Then

the play icon turns into

from . For details about playing, refer to descriptions in

Play Options

. During waveform playing, the value in Current changes dynamically.

During playing, you can also click or tap the icon

again to suspend playing

manually. ∆T indicates the time interval between the current frame and the first frame

during the recording process.

20.2 Record Options

During the waveform recording, the oscilloscope records the waveforms of the

currently enabled channel at a specified interval until you manually stops the

recording operation or the number of recorded frames has reached the limit

Before recording the waveforms, set the following parameters.

1. Interval

The recording interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the

recording process.

Click or tap the

Interval input field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

time interval between frames. You can also use the front-panel multipurpose knob

to set the value. The available range is from 10 ns to 1 s.

2. Frames

The recording frames refer to the number of frames that can be recorded actually.

After starting the recording operation, the oscilloscope stops the recording

Waveform Recording and Playing

221

operation automatically when the number of recorded frames reaches the set

value.

Click or tap the

Frames input field to set the number of waveform frames to be

recorded currently. You can also use the front-panel multipurpose knob to set the

value. The range available is from 1 to the maximum number of frames that can be

recorded currently.

3. Max Frames

The input field of

Max Frames displays the maximum number of frames that can

be recorded currently. Click or tap

Max and the frames will be automatically set to

the maximum value.

As the waveform memory is fixed, the more points in each frame, the fewer

waveform frames that can be recorded. Therefore, the maximum number of

recorded frames depends on currently selected "memory depth" (refer to

Memory

Depth

). The number of waveform points per frame is the current memory depth.

Memory Depth ≥ Sample Rate x Horizontal Time Base x Number of Grids in the

Horizontal Direction. Therefore, the Max. value of waveform recording is also

related to the "Sample Rate" and "Horizontal Time Base".

4. Beeper

: the beeper sounds at the end of recording.

: the beeper does not sound at the end of recording.

20.3 Play Options

Waveform playing function can play back the waveforms currently recorded. In Play,

click or tap the

Minimize on/off switch to select whether to minimize the menu.

When

ON is selected, the window is minimized, making the display more simplified,

easy for observation and operation. The minimized menu is as shown in the figure

below.

Waveform Recording and Playing

DHO900 User Guide

222

Play Mode

Back to Start

Frame

Previous Frame

Play Button

Next Frame

Play Sequence

Start Frame

End Frame

Time Interval

Back to End

Frame

Figure 20.2 Minimized "Play" Menu

Before playing the waveforms, set the following parameters.

1. Play Mode

You can play the waveforms in single mode (

) or cycle mode ( ).

: plays from the start frame to the end frame, and then stops automatically.

- : plays from the start frame to the end frame, then such playback operation

is repeated until you stop it manually.

2. Play Sequence

You can play back the waveforms clockwise (

) or counterclockwise ( ).

: plays from the start frame to the end frame.

: plays from the end frame to the start frame.

3. Interval

The playback interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the

playing process.

Click or tap the input field of Interval, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the time interval between frames. You can also use the corresponding

multipurpose knob to set the value. The available range is from 1 ms to 1 s.

4. Start Frame

Waveform Recording and Playing

223

Click or tap the "Start Frame" input field in

Figure 20.2

to set the start frame for

playing back the waveforms. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose

knob to set the value. The default is 1, and the maximum value is the maximum

number of frames recorded.

5. End Frame

Click or tap the "End Frame" input field in

Figure 20.2

to set the end frame for

playing back the waveforms. You can also use the corresponding multipurpose

knob to set the value. The default is the number of frames of the recorded

waveforms.

6. Current Frame

When the playing is stopped, click or tap the "Current" input field in

Figure 20.2

set the currently displayed frame with the pop-up numeric keypad. You can also

use the corresponding numeric keypad to set the value. The maximum allowed is

the number of recorded frames.

Waveform Recording and Playing

DHO900 User Guide

224

Search and Navigation

The Search function allows you to quickly find and mark the event of interest and

then go to the specified event in the marktable by navigating search events. The

search types include edge and pulse.

The Navigation function allows you to navigate time, search events, and segments.

21.1 Search

This function allows you to search for the specified edge and pulse width trigger

vents. Found search events are marked with small inverted triangles (

) at the top

of the graticule. Click or tap

> Search to enter the "Search" menu. You can also

click or tap

Search in the "Navigation" menu (only when the navigation mode is set to

"Search Event") to enter the "Search" menu, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 21.1 Search Menu

Search On/Off

Click or tap

Search on/off switch to enable or disable the search function.

TIP

Enabling the search function automatically turns on the

Zoom Mode (Delayed Sweep)

2. Set up searches

Search and Navigation

225

Click or tap the Type drop-down button to select "Edge" or "Pulse". Click or tap

the

Source drop-down button to select the source.

- Edge Searches: After setting the search type to "Edge", you can select the slope

type. For details, please refer to

Edge Trigger

. You can click or tap the

Threshold input filed to set the threshold with the pop-up numeric keypad or

use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

- Pulse Width Searches: After setting the search type to "Pulse", you can set the

trigger condition. For details, please refer to

Pulse Width Trigger

. You can click

or tap the

Threshold input filed to set the threshold with the pop-up numeric

keypad or use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the value.

Copy search setups

- Copy to Trigger

Click or tap

To Trigger to copy the setup for the selected search type to the

same trigger type. For example, if the current search type is "Edge", clicking or

tapping

To Trigger copies the search settings to the "

Edge Trigger

" settings.

- Copy from Trigger

Click or tap

From Trigger to copy the trigger setup for the selected search type

to the search setup. For example, if the current trigger type is "

Edge Trigger

clicking or tapping

From Trigger copies the trigger settings to the "Edge"

search setup.

NOTE

To use the "To Trigger" or "From Trigger" function, the current trigger type should

correspond to the search type. Otherwise, a prompt message "Type mismatch" will pop up.

4. Marktable On/Off

Click or tap the

MarkTable on/off switch to turn on or off the marktable display, as

shown in the figure below. The table lists all events of the current waveform in the

Waveform View. Zooming or adjusting the waveform causes the events in the table

to change. You can perform the following operations on the table:

- When acquisitions are stopped (STOP mode), click or tap any row of the table to

select the specified event. The inverted triangle mark of the selected event turns

red like

- Click or tap

at the upper-right side of the table to open the search menu.

- Select the gray title bar of the table to drag the table and move the table

window.

- Click or tap

at the upper-right side of the table to close the search menu.

Search and Navigation

DHO900 User Guide

226

Figure 21.2 MarkTable Display

5. Navigation

Click or tap

Navigation to access the navigation menu. You can use the "Search

Event" mode in

Navigation

to navigate through the search events.

6. Save search events

You can save the event data to the instrument’s internal memory or an external

USB storage device in format of "*.csv".

Click or tap

Save events to access the "Save" menu. For details, please refer to

Save a File

21.2 Navigation

The Navigation function allows you to navigate time, search events, and segments.

You can assess the

Navigation menu in the following ways.

• Press the front-panel

key to access the menu.

• Click or tap Navigate on the toolbar at the upper-right of the interface.

• In the "Search" menu, click or tap Navigation to access the menu.

Search and Navigation

227

Figure 21.3 Navigation Menu

The normal Navigation menu is as shown in the figure above. You can click or tap

to minimize the menu (see the figure below) for a simplified interface.

Figure 21.4 Simplified Navigation Menu

TIP

The navigation function is available only when the oscilloscope is in “STOP” state (acquisition

stopped).

Navigate time

It is available only when in "YT" time mode. The menu is as shown in

Figure 21.3

When "Time" is selected, click or tap

in "Navigation" menu or press the front-

panel

key to start/stop playout. During playout, you can click or tap to play

backward or

to play forward. The playout automatically stops when it reaches the

left or right edges. When it stops, clicking or tapping

/ moves the waveform.

Click or tap the

Speed drop-down button to select the speed level.

Navigate search events

After searching events using the Search function, you can select the "Search Event"

mode in Navigation menu to navigate to specific events in the marktable. Its setting

menu is as shown in

Figure 21.5

Search and Navigation

DHO900 User Guide

228

Figure 21.5 "Search Event" Navigation Setting Menu

After "Search Event" is selected, click or tap

Search to open the "Search" menu and

set the search condition. For search setup, please refer to

. You can select the

search type from the

Type item. Click or tap to go to the previous search event or

to go to the next search event. Click or tap to go to the first event or to

go to the last event.

Navigate segments

This mode is available only in UltraAcquire acquisition mode. When UltraAcquire is

enabled, the

Mode is automatically set to "Frame Segment" which cannot be

modified. Its setting menu is as shown in

Figure 21.6

Figure 21.6 "Frame Segment" Navigation Setting Menu

• In this mode, you can click or tap the Display mode drop-down button to set

the display mode of segments. For details, please refer to

UltraAcquire

• Click or tap

Start Frame and End Frame input fields to set the start frame and

end frame which define the segment range to navigate through. You can also

use the corresponding multipurpose knob to set the start/end frame. After you

Search and Navigation

229

click or tap the play/stop key, it plays from the "Start Frame" and the number of

frames that can display on each screen page is (End Frame-Start Frame+1).

For example, if you set the start frame to 3 and the end frame to 9, it will play

from the 3rd frame and displays 7 frames at a page.

• Click or tap

in "Navigation" menu or press the front-panel key to start/

stop playing through the frames between the

Start Frame and End Frame.

During playout, you can click or tap

to play backward or to play forward.

The playout automatically stops when it reaches the left or right edges. When it

stops, you can click or tap

/ to go forward or backward. You can also click

or tap

to go to the first page or to go to the last page. The current

page/total pages is indicated in

Current Page.

TIP

During segment playing, you are not allowed to change the start/end frame.

Search and Navigation

DHO900 User Guide

230

Display Control

In the Display setting menu, you can set the type, persistence time, waveform

intensity, grid type, grid brightness, and etc. Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen, and then select Display to enter the

"Display" menu. You can also click or tap the

icon at the upper-right of the

Waveform View to enter the "Display" menu.

Figure 22.1 Display Setting Menu

22.1 Display Type

This series oscilloscope provides the "Vector" display mode in which the sample

points are connected by lines and displayed. In most cases, this mode can provide the

most vivid waveform for you to view the steep edge of the waveform (such as square

waveform).

22.2 Persistence Time

In the Display setting menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Persistence Time

to select the persistence time. The available values are Min, specific values (100 ms,

200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s), and Infinite.

Display Control

231

In the following part, a frequency sweep signal of the sine waveform is used to show

the waveform effects in different persistence times.

• Min

Enables you to view waveform changing in high refresh rate.

• Specific Values

Enables you to view glitches that change relatively slowly or glitches with lower

occurrence probability. The persistence time can be set to 100 ms, 200 ms, 500

ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, or 10 s.

• Infinite

In this mode, the oscilloscope displays the waveform newly acquired without

clearing the waveforms acquired formerly. The waveforms acquired formerly will

be displayed in relatively low-brightness color and the newly acquired

waveforms will be displayed in normal brightness and color. Infinite persistence

can be used to measure noise and jitter and to capture incidental events.

22.3 Waveform Intensity

In Display menu, drag the slide bar of Wave Intensity to set the brightness of

waveforms. The default is 50%, and the range available is from 1% to 100%.

22.4 To Set the Screen Grid

In the Display menu, select "FULL", "HALF", or "NONE" in Grid.

• FULL: turns the background grid on.

• HALF: turns part of the grid off, leaving only the main grid.

• NONE: turns the background grid off.

22.5 Display Settings

Grid Brightness

In the

Display setting menu, drag the slider of Grid Brightness to set the grid

brightness. The default is 50%, and the range available is from 0% to 100%.

Display Control

DHO900 User Guide

232

Window Transparency

In the

Display setting menu, drag the slider of Window Transparency to set the

window transparency. The default is 50%, and the range available is from 0% to 100%.

Cursor Brightness

In the

Display setting menu, drag the slider of Cursor Brightness to set the cursor

brightness. The default is 80%, and the range available is from 0% to 100%.

22.6 Show Scale

In the Display setting menu, click or tap the Show Scale on/off switch to enable or

disable scale display on the screen. By default, it is ON.

22.7 Color Grade

In the Display setting menu, click or tap the Color Grade on/off switch to enable or

disable the color grade display. By default, it is OFF.

When it is enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to indicate the times

of data acquisition or acquisition probability.

22.8 Waveform Freeze

In the Display setting menu, click or tap the Waveform Freeze on/off switch to

enable or disable the waveform freeze function. By default, it is ON.

When the function is enabled, the oscilloscope displays the waveform after multiple

sampling and superposition when sampling is stopped. You can click or tap the

STOP/RUN button at the upper-right side of the screen or press the front-panel

key to stop sampling. If this function is disabled, the last triggered waveform is

displayed.

Display Control

233

Store and Load

You can save the current setups, waveforms, screen image, and parameters of the

oscilloscope to the internal memory or external USB storage device (such as USB

storage device) in various formats and recall the stored setups or waveforms when

necessary. You can also load the upgrade software to the system and perform the

upgrade operation for the instrument.

You can also copy, delete, or rename the specified type of file from the internal

memory or external USB storage device via the disk management menu.

This oscilloscope provides one USB HOST interfaces on the front panel, which can be

connected to the USB storage device for external storage. The USB storage device

connected is marked as "Removable USB Disk (D)".

23.1 To Enter the Storage Menu

You can enter the storage setting menu in the following ways.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select

Storage to enter the storage setting menu.

• Click or tap the

Storage button on the toolbar to enter the storage setting

menu.

In the

Storage setting menu, there are three sub-menus (Save, Load, and Upgrade)

for you to choose. Select the specified sub-menu and configure the corresponding

parameters.

23.2 To Save a File

In the Storage menu, click or tap the Save tab to enter the save setting menu. In this

menu, you can save the image, waveform, or setup files.

23.2.1 To Save Image

In the Storage menu, click or tap the Save tab to enter the save operation menu. In

this menu, click or tap the drop-down button of

Choose to select "Save Image" to

enter the "Save Image" setting menu. Set the relevant parameters and save the image

to the internal or external memory.

Store and Load

DHO900 User Guide

234

Figure 23.1 Image Saving Setting Menu

Set the image format

• Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select "*.png", "*.bmp", or

"*.jpg". Then the screen image will be saved to the internal or external memory

in the selected format.

• Invert

Click or tap the

Invert on/off switch to turn on/off inverting image colors.

• Color

Click or tap the

Color toggle button to select "Color" or "Gray" images.

• Header

Click or tap the

Header on/off switch to enable or disable the display of the

header. If you select "ON", the instrument model and the image creation date

will be displayed in the header of the image after you save the image file.

Set the file saving parameters

• Set the filename

Click or tap the input field of

File Name to input the file name to be saved with

the pop-up virtual keypad.

• Set the file path

Store and Load

235

Click or tap the input field of File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed. Select the target directory and then click or tap

OK to set the file path.

For detailed operations, refer to descriptions in

Disk Management

When a USB device is not connected, the default file path is the "Local Disk";

when a USB device is detected, the path is automatically set to "D:".

• Overlay

Click or tap the

Overlay on/off switch to enable or disable the overwriting

function. When this function is enabled, the existing file in the specified file path

will be overwritten by the newly saved file that has the same filename as the

existing one.

Click or tap

Save, the current screen image is saved based on the settings and the

storage menu is disabled.

TIP

When the quick action function is set to "Save Image" or "Save Group" with "Save Image"

selected, you can press the front-panel

key to save the image.

23.2.2 To Save Wave

In the Storage menu, click or tap the Save tab to enter the save operation menu. In

this menu, click or tap the drop-down button of

Choose to select "Save Wave" to

enter the "Save Wave" setting menu. The main settings (e.g. channel on/off state,

vertical scale, and horizontal time base) and waveform data of all enabled channel will

be saved to the internal or external memory.

Store and Load

DHO900 User Guide

236

Figure 23.2 Waveform Saving Setting Menu

Set the source of the waveform data and the format of the saved waveform

• Data source

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Data Source to select "Screen" or

"Memory".

• Waveform format

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select the format of the saved

waveform. When the data source is set to "Screen", the format can be set to

"*.bin" or "*.csv"; when the data source is set to "Memory", the format can be

set to "*.bin", "*.csv", or "*.wfm".

Set the file saving parameters

• Set the filename

Click or tap the input field of

File Name to input the file name to be saved with

the pop-up virtual keypad.

• Set the file path

Click or tap the input field of

File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed. Select the target directory and then click or tap

OK to set the file path.

For detailed operations, refer to descriptions in

Disk Management

When a USB device is not connected, the default file path is the "Local Disk";

when a USB device is detected, the path is automatically set to "D:".

Store and Load

237

• Overlay

Click or tap the

Overlay on/off switch to enable or disable the overwriting

function. When this function is enabled, the existing file in the specified file path

will be overwritten by the newly saved file that has the same filename as the

existing one.

Click or tap

Save, the current waveform file is saved based on the settings and the

storage menu is disabled.

TIP

When the quick action function is set to "Save Wave" or "Save Group" with "Save Wave"

selected, you can press the front-panel

key to save the waveform.

23.2.3 Save Setup

In the Storage menu, click or tap the Save tab to enter the save operation menu. In

this menu, click or tap the drop-down button of

Choose to select "Save Setup" to

enter the "Save Setup" setting menu. Save the settings of the oscilloscope to the

internal or external memory in "*.stp" format. When loading, the stored settings can

be recalled.

Figure 23.3 Setup Saving Setting Menu

Set the file saving parameters

• Set the filename

Store and Load

DHO900 User Guide

238

Click or tap the input field of File Name to input the file name to be saved with

the pop-up virtual keypad.

• Set the file path

Click or tap the input field of

File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed. Select the target file path and then click or tap

OK. For detailed

operations, refer to descriptions in

Disk Management

When a USB device is not connected, the default file path is the "Local Disk";

when a USB device is detected, the path is automatically set to "D:".

• Overlay

Click or tap the

Overlay on/off switch to enable or disable the overwriting

function. When this function is enabled, the existing file in the specified file path

will be overwritten by the newly saved file that has the same filename as the

existing one.

Click or tap

Save, the current setup file is saved based on the settings and the storage

menu is disabled.

TIP

When the quick action function is set to "Save Setup" or "Save Group" with "Save Setup"

selected, you can press the front-panel

key to save the setup.

23.2.4 Binary Data Format (.bin)

Binary data format stores waveform data in binary format and provides data headers

that describe these data. As data are displayed in binary format, its file size is much

more smaller than that in ASCII format. If several channels are enabled, then all the

displayed channels will be saved (save the first channel then save the second, and

then it goes on like this until all the displayed channels are saved).

Table 23.1 BIN File Format

File

Header

Waveform

Header

Waveform

Data

Header

Channel

Data

Waveform

Header

Waveform

Data

Header

Channel

Data

16 Bytes 140 Bytes 16 Bytes n Bytes 140 Bytes 16 Bytes n Bytes

In BIN file format, it contains the following channel data:

• CH1 Data

• CH2 Data

• CH3 Data

• CH4 Data

Store and Load

239

• Math Waveform Data

Binary Header Format

1. File Header

There is only one file header in a binary file. The file header contains the following

information.

Table 23.2 File Header

Two-byte characters, RG, indicating that the file is the RIGOL

binary data file format.

Version Two-byte, indicating the file version.

File Size

An 8-byte long integer, indicating the number of bytes in the

file. It includes the header.

Number of

Waveforms

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveforms that are

stored in the file.

2. Waveform Header

It is possible to store several waveforms in the file. Each stored waveform has a

waveform header. When several channels are stored, each channel can be

considered as a separate waveform. The waveform header contains the

information about the type of waveform data that are stored following the

waveform data header.

Table 23.3 Waveform Header

Header Size A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the header.

Waveform Type

A 4-byte integer, indicating the type of the waveform stored in

the file. It is fixed to 1.

- 0 = Unknown

- 1 = Normal

- 2 = Peak Detection

- 3 = Average

- 4 = Not Used

- 5 = Not Used

- 6 = Logic

Number of

Waveform Buffers

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform buffers

required to read the data. It is fixed to 1.

Store and Load

DHO900 User Guide

240

Number of Points

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform points in

the data.

Count A 4-byte integer. It is fixed to 0.

X Display Range

A 4-byte float, indicating the X-axis duration of the waveform

that is displayed. For time-domain waveforms, it indicates the

duration of the display. If the value is zero, then no data has

been acquired.

X Display Origin

An 8-byte double-precision floating-point, indicating the X-

axis value at the left edge of the screen. For time-domain

waveforms, it indicates the time at the start of the display. The

value is treated as a double precision 64-bit float point

number. If the value is zero, then no data has been acquired.

X Increment

An 8-byte double-precision floating-point, indicating the

duration between data points on the X-axis. For time-domain

waveforms, it indicates the time between points. If the value is

zero, then no data has been acquired.

X Origin

An 8-byte double-precision floating-point, indicating the X-

axis value of the first data point in the data recording. For

time-domain waveforms, it indicates the time of the first

point. The value is treated as a double precision 64-bit float

point number. If the value is zero, then no data has been

acquired.

X Units

A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for X

values in the acquired data. It is fixed to 2.

- 0 = Unknown

- 1 = Volts (V)

- 2 = Seconds (s)

- 3 = Constant

- 4 = Amps (A)

- 5 = Decibel (dB)

- 6 = Hertz (Hz)

Y Units

A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for Y

values in the acquired data. The possible values are listed

above under X Units.

Date

A 16-byte character array, indicating the date when the file is

saved.

Time

A 16-byte character array, indicating the time when the file is

saved.

Store and Load

241

Model

A 24-byte character array in the format of MODEL#:SERIAL#,

indicating the oscilloscope's model and serial number.

Channel Name

A 16-byte character array that contains the label assigned to

the waveform.

3. Waveform Data Header

A waveform may have multiple data sets. Each waveform data set has a waveform

data header. The waveform data header consists of information about the

waveform data set. The header is stored before the data set.

Table 23.4 Waveform Data Header

Header Size

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the

waveform data header.

Buffer Type

A 2-byte integer, indicating the type of the waveform data

stored in the file.

- 0 = Unknown

- 1 = Normal 32-bit float data

- 2 = Maximum float data

- 3 = Minimum float data

- 4 = Not Used

- 5 = Digital unsigned 8-bit character data (for digital

channels)

Bytes Per Point

A 2-byte short integer, indicating the number of bytes per

data point.

Buffer Size

An 8-byte long integer, indicating the number of bytes of the

current channel waveform data.

23.3 To Load a File

In the storage setting menu, click or tap the Load tab to switch to the load menu. In

this menu, you can load the local file to the instrument.

Store and Load

DHO900 User Guide

242

Figure 23.4 Load Setting Menu

Load Setup

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Choose to select "Load Setup". Then, click or

tap

File Path to load the setups from the internal memory or the external USB disk.

The default file type is "*.stp", and no other options are available. Select the file to be

loaded from the memory. Click or tap

Load to load the selected file.

23.4 Firmware Upgrade

This instrument supports local upgrade and online upgrade.

Local upgrade

1. In the storage setting menu, click or tap

Upgrade to enter the local upgrade

setting menu.

Store and Load

243

Figure 23.5 Upgrade Menu

2. Click or tap the input field of File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed. Select the upgrade file. For detailed operations, refer to

Disk

Management

3. Click or tap

Upgrade to complete the local upgrade.

Online upgrade

1. First ensure that the rear-panel LAN interface is connected to the network (if you

have limited access to the Internet, please ask the administrator for permission).

2. Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen

to enter the function navigation.

3. Then click or tap the

Upgrade icon to perform the upgrade operation.

23.5 Disk Management

You can enter the storage setting menu in the following ways.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select

Storage to enter the storage setting menu.

• Click or tap the

Storage button on the toolbar to enter the storage setting

menu.

Then click or tap

Disk at the lower-left corner of the "Storage" menu to enter the disk

management interface, as shown in the figure below.

Store and Load

DHO900 User Guide

244

Figure 23.6 Disk Management Interface

Execute the following operations through the disk management menu:

Select a Disk

Before using the external storage device, make sure that a USB storage device (FAT32/

NTFS format) is connected correctly.

By default, the "Local Disk(C)" is selected. If an external storage device is inserted,

under the "Disk" menu, two available storage disks can be selected at the upper-left

corner of the "Disk" interface: Local Disk (C) and Removable USB Disk (D). If you select

an external storage device, for example, if you select "Removable USB Disk (D)", the

contents in USB Disk(D) will be displayed.

Create a Folder

Click or tap

New Folder, then a folder name input keyboard is displayed.

For how to use the keypad, refer to descriptions in

Parameter Setting Method

. Click or

tap any place on the screen to exit the keyboard.

Clear the Internal Memory Safely

Click or tap

SecurityClear, then a prompt message "Execute secure memory wipe?" is

displayed. Click or tap

OK to clear all the files stored in the internal disk. Otherwise,

click or tap

Cancel to cancel security clear operation.

Select a File

Before operating on the file or folder, first select the desired file or folder.

Click or tap the check box at the right side of the folder, if checked, it is selected, with

an icon

being displayed. Click or tap the check box again or to deselect it.

The check box restores its original state.

Store and Load

245

This series supports selecting multiple files or folders to operate on. You can also click

or tap the icon

at the upper-right corner of the interface to select all the files and

folders under the current disk. Click or tap

to cancel the select-all operation.

Cut, Copy, or Paste a File or a Folder

• Cut a File to a Specified Folder

Select a specified file or folder. Click or tap

Cut to cut the specified file or folder.

Then select the destination folder. Then click or tap

Paste to paste the specified

file or folder to the destination folder.

• Copy a File to a Specified Folder

Select a specified file or folder. Click or tap Copy to copy the specified file or

folder. Then select the destination folder. Then click or tap

Paste to paste the

specified file or folder to the destination folder.

Delete a File or Folder

In the current folder, select the file or folder to be deleted. Click or tap

Delete, then a

prompt message "Are you sure to delete the file?" is displayed. Click or tap

OK to

delete the file. Otherwise, click or tap

Cancel to cancel the deletion operation.

Rename a File or Folder

Select a specified file or folder, then click or tap

Rename to input a new filename or

folder name with the pop-up virtual keypad. Then, the rename operation is

completed.

Store and Load

DHO900 User Guide

246

System Utility Function Setting

In the Utility menu, you can set the I/O parameters and the system-related function

parameters. You can enter the "Utility" menu in the following ways.

• Click or tap the Notification Area at the lower-right corner of the screen. Then

the Utility menu is displayed.

• Click or tap

> Utility to enter the Utility menu.

24.1 I/O Setting

In Utility menu, click or tap IO to enter the I/O setting menu to configure the

following parameters.

Network Status

Different prompts will be displayed according to the current network connection

status.

• Network Config Succeeded!

• Acquiring IP...

• IP Conflict!

• DISCONNECTED

• DHCP Config Failed

• Read Status Fail!

• CONNECTED

• Invalid IP

• IP lost

• Please wait...

MAC Address

For each instrument, the MAC address is unique. When assigning the IP address for

the instrument, the system uses the MAC address to identify the instrument.

VISA Address

Displays the VISA address currently used by the instrument.

System Utility Function Setting

247

IP Configuration Type

The configuration type of the IP address can be DHCP, Auto IP, or Static IP. In different

IP configuration types, the configurations for IP address and other network

parameters are different.

• DHCP

If "DHCP" is selected, the DHCP server in the current network will assign the

network parameters (e.g. IP address, Subnet, Gateway, and DNS) for the

instrument.

• Auto IP

When "Auto IP" is selected, the instrument will acquire the IP address ranging

from "169.254.0.1" to "169.254.255.254" and the subnet mask (255.255.0.0)

automatically based on the current network configuration. The "Auto IP" works

only when "DHCP" is not selected or the connection failed.

• Static IP

If "Static IP" is selected, the instrument is configured with static IP. In this case,

you need to disable DHCP and Auto IP manually. Then you need to configure the

parameters such as "IP address", "Subnet", "Gateway", and "DNS" manually. At

this time, you can self-define the network parameters (e.g. IP address) of the

instrument.

- Set the IP address

The format of the IP address is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first

segment (nnn) of the address is from 0 to 255 (except 127); wherein, the

valid range is from 0 to 223. The range for the other three segments is from

0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for an IP

address available.

This setting will be saved to the non-volatile memory; if "Load Last" is set to

"Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at the next power-on. The

instrument will load the preset IP address automatically.

- Set the subnet mask

The format of the subnet mask is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Wherein, the range of

"nnn" is from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network

administrator for a subnet mask available.

This setting will be saved in the non-volatile memory; if "Load Last" is set to

"Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at the next power-on. The

instrument will load the preset subnet mask automatically.

- Set the default gateway

You can set this parameter in Static IP mode. The format of the gateway is

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first segment (nnn) is from 0 to 223

(except 127), and the range for the other three segments is from 0 to 255.

System Utility Function Setting

DHO900 User Guide

248

You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a gateway

address available.

This setting will be saved in the non-volatile memory; if "Load Last" is set to

"Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at the next power-on. The

instrument will load the preset gateway automatically

- Set the DNS address

You can set this parameter in Static IP mode. The format of the DNS address

is "nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn". The range for the first segment (nnn) of the address is

from 0 to 223 (except 127); and the range for the other three segments is

from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for

an address available.

Generally, you do not need to set the DNS, so this parameter setting can be

ignored.

TIP

• When the three IP configuration types are all turned on, the priority of the parameter

configuration from high to low is "DHCP", "Auto IP", and "Static IP".

• The three IP configuration types cannot be all turned off at the same time.

mDNS

Click or tap the mDNS on/off switch to enable or disable the multicast Domain Name

System (mDNS). This system is used to provide the function of DNS server for service

discovery in a small network without a DNS server.

Host Name

A maximum of 26-byte strings can be supported.

Apply the Network Parameter Setting

Drag the menu up on the screen. Click or tap Apply at the bottom to validate the

current network parameter setting.

24.2 Basic Settings

In the Utility menu, click or tap Setup to enter the basic setting menu.

Language

This product supports menus in multiple languages, including the display of the help

information, prompt messages, and interface. Click or tap the drop-down button of

Language to select the specified system language.

Load Last

You can set the system configuration to be recalled when the oscilloscope is powered

on again after power-off. Click or tap "Default" or "Last" for

Load last.

System Utility Function Setting

249

• Last: returns to the setting of the system at last power-off.

• Default: returns to the factory setting of the system.

Power Status

• Switch Off: After the oscilloscope is connected to power, you need to press the

power key on the front panel to power on the instrument.

• Switch On: After the oscilloscope is connected to power, it will be powered on

immediately.

Beeper

Click or tap the

Beeper on/off switch to enable or disable the beeper. When the

beeper is enabled, you can hear the beeper sound in the following situations:

• Use a front-panel key or a menu key

• Use the touch screen

• When a prompt message is displayed

AUX Output

You can set the type of the signal output from the [AUX OUT] connector on the rear

panel.

• TrigOut: After this type is selected, at each trigger (hardware trigger), the

oscilloscope outputs a signal from the [AUX OUT] connector on the rear panel

that can reflect the current capture rate of the oscilloscope. If this signal is

connected to a waveform display device to measure the frequency, the found

measurement result is the same as the current capture rate.

• PassFail: When this type is selected, the instrument can output a positive or

negative pulse via the [AUX OUT] connector when a successful or failed event is

detected. Refer to descriptions in

To Set the Output Form of the Test Results

Enabling the Aux Output function in "PassFail" menu automatically toggles the

AUX Out parameter to "PassFail"; setting the AUX Out parameter to "TrigOut"

automatically disables the Aux Output function in "PassFail" menu.

Input Lock

Once the input lock is enabled, the input function is disabled, for which you can no

longer use the touch screen, front-panel keys, and knobs to configure the instrument.

Press the front-panel channel keys in the order of

, , , to

disable the input lock.

System Utility Function Setting

DHO900 User Guide

250

Expand

The waveform display can be set to expand or compress about the "Center" or

"GND".

• Center: When the vertical scale is changed, the displayed waveform will expand

or compress about the center of the display.

• GND: When the vertical scale is changed, the displayed waveform will expand or

compress about the ground level position of the signal.

Fine/Zoom

It sets the effect of pressing the front-panel Horizontal

SCALE knob.

• Fine: enables or disables the fine adjustment when the knob is pressed.

• Zoom: enables or disables the Zoom mode when the knob is pressed.

24.3 About this Oscilloscope

In Utility menu, click or tap About, and then you can view the model, version, and

other information about this instrument in

About menu.

• Model

Indicates the product model.

• Serial Number

Indicates the serial number, the unique identification for the product.

• Firmware

Indicates the firmware version number of the product.

• Hardware

Indicates the hardware version number of the product.

• Build

Indicates the creation time of the software version.

• Android.Build

Indicates the creation time of the Android operating system.

• Android.Version

Indicates the version number of the Android operating system. For example, 7.1.

• Launcher

Indicates the desktop UI version number of the Android operating system.

System Utility Function Setting

251

• WebControl

Indicates the version number of browser remote control module.

24.4 Other Settings

Open Source Acknowledgment

Click or tap

Open Source Acknowledgment to view the open source

acknowledgment of this series oscilloscope in the pop-up window.

24.5 Auto Config

In "Utility" menu, click or tap Auto Config to enter the menu in which you can

configure the

Auto function.

• Click or tap

Peak to Peak on/off switch to enable or disable the peak-to-peak

priority setting. This function is intended for the shifted signal. If there is a large

deviation, you can view the signal waveform in priority when you enable the

function.

• Click or tap

Live CH on/off switch to turn on/off examining channels that are

turned on.

If "OFF" is selected, enable the Auto function and 4 analog channels (CH1-CH4)

will be examined for signal activity in sequence. If no signal is detected for a

specified channel, the channel will be turned off; otherwise, if a signal is

detected, the channel will be autoscaled to best display the signal. If “ON” is

selected, enable the Auto function and only the channels that are turned on will

be examined.

• Click or tap Overlay on/off switch to enable or disable the waveform overlay

display function. If enabled, waveforms of different channels will be displayed in

the same position of the screen; if disabled, waveforms of different channels will

be displayed on the screen from top to bottom in sequence.

• Click or tap Keep Coupling on/off switch to turn on/off maintaining channel

coupling. If "ON" is selected, enable the Auto function and the channel coupling

setting is maintained; if "OFF" is selected, the channel coupling is DC coupling by

default.

System Utility Function Setting

DHO900 User Guide

252

24.6 SelfCal

The self-calibration program can quickly make the oscilloscope to work in an optimal

state to get the precise measurement results. You can perform self-calibration at any

time, especially when the changes of the ambient temperature reach or exceed 5℃.

Make sure that the oscilloscope has been warmed up or operating for more than 30

minutes before the self-calibration.

In "Utility" menu, click or tap SelfCal, the self-calibration menu is as shown below.

Figure 24.1 Self-calibration Menu

• Click or tap Start, and then the oscilloscope will start to execute the self-

calibration program.

• After starting the self-calibration program, click or tap

Exit to cancel self-

calibration operation at any time.

• Click or tap Close to close the self-calibration information window.

24.7 Option List

In the "Utility" menu, click or tap Options to view all the options of the instrument.

24.8 Quick Action Settings

In Utility menu, click or tap Quick to enter the menu to configure the quick action

key on the front panel.

System Utility Function Setting

253

Figure 24.2 Quick Menu

Save Image

• Click or tap Save Image, then Operation is set to "Save Image".

• In the Format menu item, available image types include "png", "bmp", and

"jpg".

• Click or tap the

Invert on/off switch to turn on/off inverting image colors.

• Click or tap "Color" or "Gray" for Color to select the desired image color.

After setup, click or tap the

key at the upper-right corner of the front panel to

capture the current screen and save the image with the specified format. The location

where the file is saved depends on the

File Path setting in Storage menu. For details,

please refer to

To Save a File

Save Wave

• Click or tap

Save Wave, then Operation is set to "Save Wave".

• Select "Memory" or "Screen" under Data Source as the source of the saved

waveform.

• Available options under

Format include "bin" and "csv".

System Utility Function Setting

DHO900 User Guide

254

After setup, click or tap the key at the upper-right corner of the front panel to

save the waveform based on the settings. The location where the file is saved

depends on the

File Path setting in Storage menu. For details, please refer to

To Save

a File

Save Setup

Click or tap

Save Setup, then Operation is set to "Save Setup".

After setup, click or tap the

key at the upper-right corner of the front panel to

save the setup file suffixed with ".stp". The location where the file is saved depends on

the

File Path setting in Storage menu. For details, please refer to

To Save a File

All Measurements

• Click or tap

All Measure, then Operation is set to "All Measure".

• In All Measure item, click or tap the drop-down button to select the channel

(CH1-CH4) to measure.

After setup, click or tap the

key at the upper-right corner of the front panel to

perform the measurement on the specified channel.

Reset Statistics

• Click or tap

Stat Reset, then Operation is set to "Stat Reset".

• Click or tap "Measure" or "Pass/Fail" under Stat Reset to reset all statistics of the

"Measure" or "Pass/Fail" function.

After setup, click or tap the

key at the upper-right corner of the front panel.

This resets all statistics of the specified function in the

Result sidebar at the right side

of the screen and starts the measurements again.

Waveform Recording

Click or tap

Record, then Operation is set to "Record".

After setup, click or tap the

key at the upper-right corner of the front panel to

perform the waveform recording.

Save Group

• Click or tap

Save Group, then Operation is set to "Save Group".

• Under Save Group, select one or more items from "Save Image", "Save Wave",

and "Save Setup".

System Utility Function Setting

255

After setup, click or tap the key at the upper-right corner of the front panel to

save the selected items based on the settings. The location where the file is saved

depends on the

File Path setting in Storage menu. For details, please refer to

To Save

a File

24.9 Self-check

In Utility menu, click or tap Self Check to enter the "Self Check" setting. You can test

the following self-check items for the device.

Key Test

Click or tap

Key Test to enter the key test interface (virtual front-panel key).

At this time, you can press the front-panel keys to check whether the virtual keys are

highlighted. If yes, it indicates that the keys work normally; if no, it indicates that

there's something wrong with the keys. Click or tap

Exit at the lower-left corner of the

interface to exit the key test interface.

Touch Test

Click or tap

Touch Test to enter the touch screen test interface.

Slide with your finger on the screen. If there is a line displaying at the empty area

where you slide on the screen and the box that you tap turns out to be filled with

green background, it indicates that the touch function of this area is normal. Click or

tap

Exit at the lower-left corner of the interface to exit the touch screen test interface.

Screen Test

Click or tap

Screen Test to enter the screen test interface and check whether the

defective pixel exists.

There are 15 screen test interfaces. Click or tap the screen to switch to the next screen

test interface. Click or tap

Exit at the upper-left corner of the interface to exit the

screen test interface.

Board Test

Click or tap

Board Test, then the board test interface is displayed. Check whether the

status of each module is in good condition.

System Utility Function Setting

DHO900 User Guide

256

Remote Control

The following ways of remote control are supported:

• User-defined Programming

Users can program and control the instrument by using the SCPI (Standard

Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands. For details about the

SCPI commands and programming, refer to

Programming Guide

of this product

series.

• PC Software

Users can use the PC software to send commands to control the instrument

remotely. RIGOL Ultra Sigma is recommended. You can download the software

from RIGOL official website (

http://www.rigol.com

Operation Procedures:

- Set up communication between the instrument and PC.

- Run Ultra Sigma and search for the instrument resource.

- Open the remote command control panel to send commands.

• Web Control

This instrument supports Web Control. Connect the instrument to the network,

then input the IP address of the instrument into the address bar of the browser

of your computer. The web control interface is displayed. Click Web Control to

enter the web control page. Then you can view the display of the real-time

interface of the instrument. Through the Web Control method, you can migrant

the device control to the control terminals (e.g. PC, Mobile, iPad, and other smart

terminals) to realize remote control of the instrument. When you first log in to

the Web Control, the user name is "admin" and password is "rigol".

This instrument can be connected to the PC via the USB and LAN interface to set up

communication and realize remote control through the PC. The remote control can be

realized by using SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)

commands.

This chapter will illustrate how to use the RIGOL Ultra Sigma software to remotely

control the instrument via various interfaces.

CAUTION

Before connecting the communication cable, please turn off the instrument to avoid

causing damage to the communication interfaces.

Remote Control

257

25.1 Remote Control via USB

1. Connect the device

Use the USB cable to connect the rear-panel USB DEVICE interface of the

instrument to the USB HOST interface of the PC.

2. Search for the device resource

Start up Ultra Sigma and the software will automatically search for the resource

currently connected to the PC via the USB interface. You can also click

USB-TMC to

search for the resource.

3. View the device resource

The resources found will appear under the "RIGOL Online Resource" directory, and

the model number and USB interface information of the instrument will also be

displayed.

4. Control the instrument remotely

Right-click the device resource name and select "SCPI Panel Control" to open the

remotely command control panel. Then you can send commands and read data

through the panel. For details about the SCPI commands and programming, refer

to the Programming Guide of this instrument.

25.2 Remote Control via LAN

1. Connect the device

Use the network cable to connect the instrument to your local area network (LAN).

2. Configure network parameters

Configure the network parameters of the instrument according to

I/O Setting

3. Search for Search device resource

Start up Ultra Sigma and click

LAN to open the panel as shown in the figure below.

Click

Search and the software searches for the instrument resources currently

connected to the LAN and the resources found are displayed at the right section of

the window as shown in the figure below. Click

OK to add it.

Remote Control

DHO900 User Guide

258

Besides, you can input the IP address of the instrument manually into the text field

under "Manual Input LAN Instrument IP", then click

TEST. If the instrument passes

the test, click

Add to add the instrument to the LAN instrument resource list in the

right section; if the instrument fails the test, please check whether the IP address

that you input is correct, or use the auto search method to add the instrument

resource.

4. View the device resource

The resources found will appear under the "RIGOL Online Resource" directory.

5. Control the instrument remotely

Right-click the device resource name and select "SCPI Panel Control" to open the

remotely command control panel. Then you can send commands and read data

through the panel.

6. Load LXI webpage

As this instrument conforms to LXI CORE 2011 DEVICE standards, you can load LXI

web page through Ultra Sigma (right-click the instrument resource name and

select "LXI-Web"). Various important information about the instrument (including

the model, manufacturer, serial number, description, MAC address, and IP address)

will be displayed on the web page. You can also directly input the IP address of the

instrument in the address bar of the PC browser to load the LXI web page.

Remote Control

259

Troubleshooting

1. When I power on the instrument, the instrument's screen stays black and does

not display anything.

a. Check whether the power supply has been connected correctly.

b. Check whether the power key is really pressed.

c. Restart the instrument after finishing the above inspections.

d. If the problem still persists, please contact RIGOL.

2. No waveform of the signal is displayed on the screen.

a. Check whether the probe is properly connected to the item under test.

b. Check whether there are signals generated from the item to be tested (you can

connect the probe compensation output signal to the faulty channel to locate

the problem, and then determine whether the channel or the item to be tested

has a problem).

c. Resample the signal.

d. If the problem still persists, please contact RIGOL.

3. The USB storage device cannot be recognized.

a. Check whether the USB storage device can work normally when connected to

other instruments or PC.

b. Make sure that the USB storage device is FAT32/NTFS format. The instrument

doesn't support hardware USB storage device.

c. After restarting the instrument, insert the USB storage device again to check

whether it can work normally.

d. If the USB storage device still cannot work normally, please contact RIGOL.

4. The touch-enabled operation does not work.

a. Check whether you have locked the touch screen. If yes, unlock the touch

screen.

b. Check whether the screen or your finger is stained with oil or sweat. If yes,

please clean the screen or dry your hands.

c. Check whether there is a strong magnetic field around the instrument. If the

instrument is close to the strong magnetic field (e.g. a magnet), please move

the instrument away from the magnet field.

d. If the problem still persists, please contact RIGOL.

Troubleshooting

DHO900 User Guide

260

Appendix

27.1 Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Order Information Order No.

Model

250 MHz, 1.25 GSa/s, 50 Mpts, 4CH DHO924S

250 MHz, 1.25 GSa/s, 50 Mpts, 4CH DHO924

125 MHz, 1.25 GSa/s, 50 Mpts, 4CH DHO914S

125 MHz, 1.25 GSa/s, 50 Mpts, 4CH DHO914

Standard Accessories

Power Adaptor Conforming to the Standard of the

Destination Country

— —

Banana-Plug Ground Connecting Cable — —

DHO924/DHO924S: Passive Probe x4 (350 MHz) PVP2350

DHO914/DHO914S: Passive Probe x4 (150 MHz) PVP3150

Recommended Accessories

16-channel Logic Analyzer Probe PLA2216

NOTE

For all the mainframes, accessories and options, please contact the local office of RIGOL.

27.2 Appendix B: Warranty

RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. (hereinafter referred to as RIGOL) warrants that the

product mainframe and product accessories will be free from defects in materials and

workmanship within the warranty period. If a product proves defective within the

warranty period, RIGOL guarantees free replacement or repair for the defective

product.

To get repair service, please contact your nearest RIGOL sales or service office.

There is no other warranty, expressed or implied, except such as is expressly set forth

herein or other applicable warranty card. There is no implied warranty of

merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Under no circumstances shall

Appendix

261

RIGOL be liable for any consequential, indirect, ensuing, or special damages for any

breach of warranty in any case.

27.3 Appendix C: Factory Settings

Press the front-panel or click/tap Default on the Toolbar and a prompt

message "Restore default settings?" is displayed. Click or tap

OK to restore the

instrument to its factory default settings, as shown in the table below.

Table 27.2 Factory Settings

Parameter Factory Settings

Horizontal

Horizontal Time Base 2 μs

Horizontal Position 0 s

Delayed Sweep OFF

Roll Auto

Fine OFF

Horizontal Expansion Center

Acquisition

Acquisition Mode Normal

Memory Depth 10 kpts

Vertical

CH1 On/Off ON

CH2 On/Off OFF

CH3 On/Off OFF

CH4 On/Off OFF

Impedance 1 MΩ

Fine OFF

Vertical Scale 50 mV

Vertical Offset 0 V

Channel Unit [V]

Channel Coupling DC

Bias 0 V

BW Limit OFF

Channel Delay 0 s

Display Label OFF

Invert OFF

Attenuation 1X

Appendix

DHO900 User Guide

262

Parameter Factory Settings

Trigger

Trigger Type Edge Trigger

Trigger Mode Auto

Source Selection CH1

Edge Type Rising

Trigger Coupling DC

Trigger Holdoff 8 ns

Noise Rejection OFF

Display

Display Type Vector

Persistence Time Min

Waveform Intensity 50%

Grid FULL

Grid Brightness 50%

Window Transparency 50%

Cursor Brightness 80%

Show Scale ON

Color Grade OFF

Waveform Freeze ON

Measure

Threshold OFF

Indicator OFF

Histogram OFF

Statistics OFF

Count 1,000

Display Type %

Source CH1

Upper 90%

Mid 50%

Lower 10%

Amplitude Measurement

Method

Auto

Region Main

Cursor

Mode OFF

Manual

Source CH1

Select X

AX BX OFF

Appendix

263

Parameter Factory Settings

AY -6 μs

BY 6 μs

Track

AX Source CH1

BX Source CH1

AX BX OFF

Track X

AX -6 μs

BX 6 μs

Select X

AX BX OFF

AX -150 mV

BX 150 mV

Frequency Counter

Source CH1

Statistics OFF

Measure Frequency

Resolution 4

DVM

Source CH1

Mode AC RMS

Beeper OFF

Limits Condition Setting In Limits

Upper 1 V

Lower 0 V

Save Image

Format *.png

Invert OFF

Color Color

Header ON

Overlay OFF

Save Wave

Data source Screen

Format *.bin

Save Setup

File Type *.stp

Appendix

DHO900 User Guide

264

Parameter Factory Settings

Load Setup

File Type *.stp

System Setting

Beeper OFF

AUX Output TrigOut

Input Lock OFF

Expand GND

Fine/Zoom Fine

Auto Config

Peak to Peak ON

Live CH OFF

Overlay ON

Coupling OFF

Quick Settings

Operation Save Image

Format *.png

Invert OFF

Color Color

Pass/Fail Test

Enable OFF

Source CH1

Y Mask 480 mdiv

X Mask 240 mdiv

Format (to load file) *.pf

Format (to save file) *.pf

File Name RigolDS

Aux Output OFF

Pulse 1 μs

Output Event Fail

Polarity Positive

Error Action Stop

Waveform Recording

Waveform Recording OFF

Record

Interval 10 ns

Frames 1,000

Beeper

Appendix

265

Parameter Factory Settings

Play

Minimize OFF

Play Mode

Play Sequence

Interval 100 ms

Math Operation

Invert OFF

Expand GND

Display Label OFF

Grid FULL

A+B

Operation OFF

Source A CH1

Source B CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

A-B

Operation OFF

Source A CH1

Source B CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

A×B

Operation OFF

Source A CH1

Source B CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

A÷B

Operation OFF

Source A CH1

Source B CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

FFT

Operation OFF

Source CH1

X Span-Center

Unit dBm/dBV

Center Frequency 5 MHz

Appendix

DHO900 User Guide

266

Parameter Factory Settings

Frequency Range 10 MHz

Vertical Scale 20 dB

Offset 0 dBV

Window Function Hanning

Color Grade OFF

Peak Search OFF

Peak Number 5

Threshold 5.5 dBV

Threshold 1.8 dB

Order Amp Order

A&&B

Operation OFF

Source A CH1

Source B CH1

Waveform Size Medium

Offset 0 div

Sensitivity 300 mdiv

Thre.CH1 0 V

Thre.CH2 0 V

Thre.CH3 0 V

Thre.CH4 0 V

A||B

Operation OFF

Source A CH1

Source B CH1

Waveform Size Medium

Offset 0 div

Sensitivity 300 mdiv

Thre.CH1 0 V

Thre.CH2 0 V

Thre.CH3 0 V

Thre.CH4 0 V

A^B

Operation OFF

Source A CH1

Source B CH1

Waveform Size Medium

Offset 0 div

Sensitivity 300 mdiv

Thre.CH1 0 V

Thre.CH2 0 V

Appendix

267

Parameter Factory Settings

Thre.CH3 0 V

Thre.CH4 0 V

Operation OFF

Source A CH1

Waveform Size Medium

Offset 0 div

Sensitivity 300 mdiv

Thre.CH1 0 V

Thre.CH2 0 V

Thre.CH3 0 V

Thre.CH4 0 V

Intg

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV*s

Offset 0 V*s

Offset 0 V

Diff

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV/s

Offset 0 V/s

Smooth 5

Sqrt

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

Exp

Operation OFF

Appendix

DHO900 User Guide

268

Parameter Factory Settings

Source CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

Abs

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

Low Pass

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

ωc 20 MHz

High Pass

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

ωc 20 MHz

Band Pass

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

ωc1 20 MHz

ωc2 40 MHz

Band Stop

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

ωc1 20 MHz

ωc2 40 MHz

AX+B

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

A 1

B 0

Appendix

269

Parameter Factory Settings

Ref

Current Ref1

Source CH1

Vertical Scale 50 mV

Vertical Offset 0 V

Label REF1

Label Display OFF

Color Orange

Decode

Bus Type Parallel

Bus Status OFF

Format Hex

Label ON

Event Table OFF

Parallel

CLK OFF

Bus CH1

Threshold 0 V

Endian Invert

Polarity Positive

RS232

TX CH1

RX OFF

Threshold 0 V

Polarity Positive

Baud Rate 9.6 kbps

Data 8 bits

Endian LSB

Parity None

Stop Bit 1 bit

I2C

CLK CH1

SCL Thre 0 V

Data CH2

SDA Thre 0 V

Exchange SCL/SDA

R/W Without

SPI

CLK CH1

CLK Threshold 0 V

Edge Type Rising

Appendix

DHO900 User Guide

270

Parameter Factory Settings

MISO CH2

MISO Threshold 0 V

MOSI OFF

Mode CS

CS CH3

CS Threshold 0 V

CS Polarity Negative

Polarity Positive

Width 8

Endian MSB

LIN

Source CH1

Threshold 0 V

Baud Rate 9.6 kbps

Parity Without

Version Both

CAN

Source CH1

Threshold 0 V

Signal Type CAN_H

Baud 1 Mbps

Sample Position 50%

D0-D7 OFF

D8-D15 OFF

D0-D7 Threshold 0 V

D8-D15 Threshold 0 V

Waveform Size Medium

Auto D15-D0

Enable ON

Function/Arbitrary Waveform Generator (only for DHO914S and DHO924S)

Output On/Off OFF

Waveform Type Sine

Frequency 1 kHz

Amplitude 5 V

Offset 0 V

Phase 0°

Bode Plot (only for DHO914S and DHO924S)

Bode Plot OFF

Appendix

271

Parameter Factory Settings

Run Status Stop

Input Source CH1

Output Source CH2

Sweep Type Log

Display Type Waveform

Start Frequency 100 Hz

Stop Frequency 1 MHz

Points/decade 10

Amplitude 200 mV

Var.Amp OFF

Histogram Analysis

Enable OFF

Type Horizontal

Source CH1

Height 2 div

Left Limit -4 μs

Right Limit 4 μs

Top Limit 100 mV

Bottom Limit -50 mV

Appendix

DHO900 User Guide

272

Rigol DHO914S oscilloscope

Product's Documents

DHO900 series user manual

Specifications

Rigol DHO914S Questions and Answers